Yamaha DGX-530 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: DGX-530

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

YPG-535

Owner’s Manual

Keyboard Stand Assembly

For information on assembling the

keyboard stand, refer to the instructions

on page 10 of this manual.

2 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO

NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one

described in the manual, on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recom-

mended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any

kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use

an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18

AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current han-

dling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the

time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify

any of the speciﬁcations without notice or obligation to update existing

units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an ampliﬁer and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that

could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods

of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an

audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting

ﬁxtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accesso-

ries. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or

installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional ﬁx-

tures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer

before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environ-

mentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the produc-

tion methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with

both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the

following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualiﬁed service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries

of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or

incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batter-

ies away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-

lated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason

its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local,

state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist

you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model num-

ber, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.

You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of pur-

chase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a perma-

nent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

92-BP (bottom)

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 3

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact

Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(class B)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også

selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS:

Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : DGX-530/YPG-535

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

(FCC DoC)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals

in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the ter-

minal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of

the three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed by

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

(2 wires)

4 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

(3)-11 1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or

overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects

on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll

anything over it.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have

the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a ﬁre.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or

heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal

components.

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment,

mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is

easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off

the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still ﬂowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand speciﬁed for the instrument. When attaching the stand or

rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent

adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the

instrument overheating.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 5

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes

of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume

controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

• Do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel

or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

Saving and backing up your data

The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when

you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the

Registration Memory (page 87.)

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important

data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a computer. (pages

95, 106)

Backing up the USB storage device/external media

•To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you

save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long

time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

● Trademarks

• The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd.

•Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Saving data

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your

instrument.

(3)-11 2/2

6 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this

electronic keyboard:

Mona Lisa

from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A.

Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans

Composition Title : Against All Odds

Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403

AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD

mance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited.

Can’t Help Falling In Love

from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII

Words and Music by George David Weiss,

Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore

Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane

Music Publishing Company, Inc.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music

data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM

mark is afﬁxed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simpliﬁed version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format.

Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that

some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control

parameters and effects.

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and

open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF ﬁle con-

taining lyric data is played.

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style ﬁle format which uses a unique conversion system to pro-

vide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with

peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the com-

puter is on).

Panel Logos

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it

has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style ﬁles, MIDI

ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use

is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE

ILLEGAL COPIES.

Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited

except for your personal use.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 7

Congratulations and thank you for purchasing

the Yamaha DGX-530/YPG-535 Portable Grand!

Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument

in order to take full advantage of its various features.

Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you ﬁnish reading,

and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function.

The DGX-530/YPG-535 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all.

• Music rest

• Accessory CD-ROM

• Owner’s manual (this book)

•Keyboard stand

•Footswitch

•AC Power Adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

*May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Included Accessories

8 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Special Features of the DGX-530/YPG-535

Graded Soft Touch keyboard

Just as on an actual piano, the lower keys are heavy in touch and the higher keys are light, with soft

touch of digital keyboard for beginners.

■ Performance assistant technology Page 37

Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect

performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do

is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the

keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in

time with the music.

And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply

by tapping one key.

All you need is

one ﬁnger!

■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices Page 17

With the DGX-530/YPG-535, the instrument voice that sounds when you

play the keyboard can be changed to violin, ﬂute, harp, or any of an extensive

range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for

example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of

musical variety.

■ Play Along with Styles Page 26

Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles.

The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band cov-

ering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and

much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or exper-

iment with new styles to expand your musical horizons.

■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 35

When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the

display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If

the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear

on the score display.

* No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display func-

tion does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 9

Panel Logos ............................................................................. 6

Included Accessories ............................................................... 7

Special Features of the DGX-530/YPG-535............................. 8

Setting Up 10

Keyboard Stand Assembly................................. 10

Power Requirements.............................................................. 12

Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) ............. 12

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)............................. 12

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)............................ 13

Turning the Power On ............................................................ 13

Panel Controls and Terminals 14

Front Panel............................................................................. 14

Rear Panel ............................................................................. 15

Quick Guide

Changing the Display Language 16

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 17

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN............................................. 17

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL .............................. 18

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT 19

Play the Grand Piano Voice ................................................... 20

Fun Sounds 21

Drum Kits................................................................................ 21

Sound Effects ......................................................................... 21

The Metronome 22

Start the Metronome............................................................... 22

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ........................................... 22

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure,

and the Length of Each Beat............................................. 23

Adjusting the Metronome Volume .......................................... 24

Playing Styles 25

Select a Style Rhythm ............................................................ 25

Play Along with a Style........................................................... 26

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 30

Using Songs 31

Select and Listen to a Song ................................................... 31

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 32

Change the Song Tempo ....................................................... 32

Play the Demo Song .............................................................. 33

Types of Songs ...................................................................... 34

Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 35

Display the Lyrics ................................................................... 36

The Easy Way to Play Piano 37

CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands.................................... 38

CHORD/FREE Type—

Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only................ 40

MELODY Type—Play with One Finger .................................. 42

CHORD/MELODY—

Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right ..... 44

Select a Song For a Lesson 48

Lesson 1—Waiting ................................................................. 49

Lesson 2—Your Tempo ......................................................... 52

Lesson 3—Minus One............................................................ 53

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn .......................... 54

Play Using the Music Database 55

Change a Song’s Style 56

Try Out the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 56

Using the Easy Song Arranger............................................... 56

Record Your Own Performance 58

Track Configuration ................................................................ 58

Recording Procedure ............................................................. 59

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs......................................... 61

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song .. 62

Backup and Initialization 63

Backup ................................................................................... 63

Initialization............................................................................. 63

Basic Operation 64

Basic Operation ......................................................................64

The Displays........................................................................... 66

MAIN Display Items ................................................................67

Reference

Play with a Variety of Effects 68

Adding Harmony..................................................................... 68

Adding Reverb........................................................................ 69

Adding Chorus........................................................................ 70

Panel Sustain .........................................................................71

Pitch Bend ..............................................................................71

Handy Performance Features 72

Tap Start................................................................................. 72

Touch Response Sensitivity ...................................................72

One Touch Setting..................................................................73

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ...............................74

Pitch Controls .........................................................................75

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 76

Pattern Variation (Sections)....................................................76

Setting the Split Point .............................................................79

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm

(Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 80

Adjusting the Style Volume.....................................................80

Chord Basics ..........................................................................81

Style File................................................................................. 83

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard ..............................83

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary..................... 84

Song Settings 85

Song Volume ..........................................................................85

A-B Repeat .............................................................................85

Muting Independent Song Parts .............................................86

Change the Melody Voice ......................................................86

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 87

Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................87

Recalling a Registration Memory............................................88

The Functions 89

Selecting and Setting Functions .............................................89

Using USB Flash Memory 92

Connecting a USB Flash Memory ..........................................92

Formatting USB Flash Memory ..............................................94

Saving Data ............................................................................95

Convert a User Song to SMF Format and Save..................... 96

Loading User Files and Style Files .........................................97

Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory ..............................98

Playing Data on a USB Flash Memory ...................................99

Connections 100

Connectors ...........................................................................100

Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................101

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer .....102

Remote Control of MIDI Devices ..........................................103

Initial Send............................................................................ 104

Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument... 104

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 107

Important Notices about the CD-ROM..................................107

CD-ROM Contents ...............................................................108

System Requirements ..........................................................109

Software Installation .............................................................109

Appendix

Troubleshooting.................................................................... 114

Messages .............................................................................116

Scores ..................................................................................118

Voice List ..............................................................................124

Drum Kit List .........................................................................128

Style List ...............................................................................130

Music Database List .............................................................131

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM..........................132

Effect Type List..................................................................... 133

MIDI Implementation Chart...................................................134

MIDI Data Format .................................................................136

Specifications .......................................................................139

Index..................................................................................... 140

Contents

10 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the

parts as needed.

z Attach the stand bases.

Making sure that the boards are facing the proper direc-

tion (the holes for the joint connectors should face inside).

The left and right side boards are the same shape. Insert the

joint connectors w into the holes as shown. The joint con-

nectors have been installed properly if you can see the

screw head on the connector.

Attach the stand bases to the bottom of the side boards,

using the 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws q. The left and

right stand bases are the same shape, and there is no differ-

ence between their front-to-back orientation. If you have

trouble screwing in the screws, use a screwdriver to rotate

the joint connectors to the appropriate position—the →

mark on the joint connectors indicates the location of the

screw hole.

Keyboard Stand Assembly

Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand.

These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from

occurring to you and others. By following these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will pro-

vide you with safe and prolonged use.

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in

accordance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop.

•Always place the stand on a ﬂat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to

become unstable or overturn, the keyboard to drop, or injury.

• Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand

may result in the object dropping or the stand overturning.

• Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to

drop.

• Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and ﬁrm before use. If not, the

stand may overturn, the keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user.

•To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

CAUTION

q 6 x 70 mm roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

Side

boards

Stand

bases

Back board

w Joint connectors (4 pcs.)

e 6 x 30 mm roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

r 5 x 16 mm roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

Assembly Parts

w Joint connectors

q 6 x 70 mm

roundhead screws

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 11

Setting Up

x Attach the back board.

Attach the back board, using the 6 x 30 mm roundhead

screws e.

c Put the keyboard on the stand.

Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and care-

fully place the keyboard on the side boards. Slowly move

the keyboard so that the holes on the bottom of the key-

board are properly aligned with the holes on the angle

brackets.

v Install the keyboard to the stand.

Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the 5 x 16

mm roundhead screws r.

e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screw

3–4

r 5 x 16 mm

roundhead

screws

■ Post-assembly checklist

Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the fol-

lowing points:

• Are there any parts left over?

➔ If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct

any errors you might have made.

• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

➔ If not, move the instrument to an appropriate location.

• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you

play it or move it?

➔ If so, properly tighten all screws.

• Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or

seems unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to

the assembly instructions and diagrams and

retighten all screws.

• Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the sharp metal ﬁt-

tings.

CAUTION

• Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your ﬁngers caught

between the keyboard and the stand parts.

CAUTION

12 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

 Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the

instrument is set to STANDBY.

 Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack.

 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on.

The instrument speakers are automatically shut off

when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/

OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You

can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard

ampliﬁer, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other

line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output

signal to that device.

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha

FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain

on and off.

Power Requirements

• Use the speciﬁed adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recom-

mended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may

result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the

instrument.

WARNING

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument,

or during electrical storms.

CAUTION

AC power

adaptor

AC outlet





Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

•Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long peri-

ods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be

damaging to your hearing.

WARNING

•To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external

devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to

observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment

damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their

minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while

playing the instrument to set the desired listening level.

CAUTION

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUS-

TAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this

changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed

footswitch operation.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 13

Setting Up

Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB ter-

minal of a computer, and you can transfer performance

data and song ﬁles between the two (page 101). To use

the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the fol-

lowing:

• First, make sure the POWER switch on the instru-

ment is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable

to connect the instrument to the computer. After

making the connections, turn the instrument’s

power on.

• Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer.

Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on

page 109.

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOL-

UME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON]

switch again to turn the power OFF.

Backup data in the ﬂash memory is loaded to the instru-

ment when the power is turned on. If no backup data

exists on ﬂash memory, all instrument settings are

restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is

turned on.

Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)

Turning the Power On

• Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is

still ﬂowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are

not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the

AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

CAUTION

•Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message

is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the ﬂash memory

and result in a loss of data.

CAUTION

● Music Rest

Insert the music rest into

the slots as shown.

14 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 13

w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 13, 64

e FILE CONTROL [MENU],

[EXECUTE] buttons................. pages 92–98

r [LYRICS] button ............................... page 36

t [SCORE] button............................... page 35

y [CHORD FINGERING] button ......... page 83

u [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.................... page 38

i [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 55

o [FUNCTION] button ................. pages 66, 89

!0 LESSON [L], [R],

[START] buttons .............................. page 49

!1 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 22

!2 [TEMPO/TAP] button ............... pages 32, 72

!3 SONG MEMORY

[REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 59

!4 [REPEAT & LEARN]/

[ACMP ON/OFF] button........... pages 54, 26

!5 [A-B REPEAT]/

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 85, 76

!6 [REW]/

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 32, 76

!7 [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button ....... pages 32, 78

!8 [PAUSE]/

[SYNC START] button ............. pages 32, 77

!9 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 25, 32, 65

@0 [SONG] button................................. page 31

@1 [EASY SONG

ARRANGER] button........................ page 56

@2 [STYLE] button................................ page 25

@3 [VOICE] button ................................ page 17

@4 Dial ............................................pages 65, 89

@5 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]

buttons......................................pages 65, 89

@6 Number buttons [0]–[9],

[+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 65, 89

@7 [DEMO] button................................. page 33

@8 [EXIT] button ................................... page 66

@9 REGIST MEMORY

[MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons.. page 87

#0 [PORTABLE GRAND] button.......... page 20

#1 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button................... page 19

#2 [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 18

#3 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 68

#4 [PITCH BEND] wheel....................... page 71

#5 Drum Kit........................................... page 21

The illustrations next to each key indicate the

drum and percussion instruments assigned to the

keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected.

r t

!1 !2

!4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9

Song Category List

(page 33)

Style Category List

(page 130)

Front Panel

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 15

Panel Controls and Terminals

#6 CONTRAST knob............................. page 67

#7 USB TO DEVICE terminal................ page 93

USB TO HOST terminal ........... page 13, 100

#8 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 12

#9 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 12

$0 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 12

#0 #1 #2 #3

#6 #7 #8 #9 $0

Rear Panel

Music Database List

(page 131)

Voice Category List

(page 124)

Display

(pages 66, 67)

Rear Panel

16 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Changing the Display Language

This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display

language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to

Japanese the lyrics, ﬁle names, demo display, and some messages will be

displayed in Japanese where appropriate.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of

times until the “Language” item appears.

The currently selected display language will appear below the “Lan-

guage” item.

When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the lan-

guage as required.

Select a display language.

The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese.

The language selection will be stored in the internal ﬂash memory so

that it is retained even when the power is turned off.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Language item

The currently selected

language

Quick Guide

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 17

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments,

this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass,

strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide vari-

ety of musical sounds.

This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button.

The main voice selection display will appear.

The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted.

Select the voice you want to play.

While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The avail-

able voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice

selected here becomes the main voice.

For this example select the “102 Flute” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a variety of voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Select and Play a Voice—MAIN

The currently

selected voice num-

ber and name

Select 102 Flute

Adjusts volume.

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

18 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard.

The second voice is known as the “dual” voice.

Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button.

The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off.

When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN dis-

play. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the

main voice when you play the keyboard.

Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than

a second.

The dual voice selection display will appear.

Select the desired dual voice.

Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice.

For this example try selecting the “120 Vibraphone” voice.

Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL

Voice Number

The currently selected dual voice

Dual voice selection display

Hold for longer than a second

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 19

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main

and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split

point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 79).

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button.

The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When

turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The

currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split

point.

Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than

a second.

The split voice selection display will appear.

Two voices will sound at the same time.

Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT

Main voice and dual voiceSplit voice

Split point

Voice Number

The currently selected split

voice

Split voice selection display

Hold for longer than a second

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

20 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Select the desired split voice.

Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you

want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice

which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example

try selecting the “038 Folk Guitar” voice.

Play the keyboard.

Try selecting and playing a range of split voices.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected.

Play the Grand Piano Voice

• When you press the [PORTA-

BLE GRAND] button all settings

other than touch sensitivity are

turned off. The dual and split

voices will also be turned off, so

only the Grand Piano voice will

play over the entire keyboard.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 21

Fun Sounds

This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can

use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet ﬂy-bys, eerie effects, and

much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties.

◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17)

1 Press the [VOICE] button.

2 Use the dial to select “128 Standard Kit 1”.

3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds!

Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percus-

sion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll

hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a

comprehensive variety of drum and percussion

sounds. For details on the instruments included

in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 128 to

139), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 128.

◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17)

1 Press the [VOICE] button.

2 Use the dial to select “139 SFX Kit 2”.

3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects!

As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a

submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many

other useful effects. “138 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning,

running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do

not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore pro-

duce no sound.

For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit

voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum

Kit List” on page 129.

Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other

normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at

different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound

of a different drum or percussion instrument.

The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 138 and 139). When

either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard.

Drum Kits

Sound Effects

22 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

The Metronome

Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [MET-

RONOME ON/OFF] button.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button

again.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo set-

ting.

Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 280.

Start the Metronome

4/4

Current setting

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

Tempo

The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo

and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most com-

fortable for you.

The Metronome

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 23

In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature.

Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for

longer than a second to select the function “Time Signa-

ture–Numerator”.

Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure.

A chime will sound on the ﬁrst beat of each measure while the other

beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the begin-

ning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”.

The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times

as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Sig-

nature–Denominator”.

Use the dial to select the beat length.

Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter

note, eighth note, or 16

note). Select 8 for this example.

Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat

Hold for longer

than a second

Denominator

(The length of

one beat.)

Numerator

(Number of

beats per

measure.)

• The metronome time signature

will synchronize to a style or

song that is playing, so these

parameters cannot be changed

while a style or song is playing.

NOTE

The Metronome

24 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Met-

ronome Volume item.

Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required.

Adjusting the Metronome Volume

Metronome volume

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 25

Playing Styles

This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces

accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to

match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 160 dif-

ferent styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures

(see page 130 for a complete list of the available styles).

In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features.

Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro

trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played

using percussion instruments only.

Press the [STYLE] button.

The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number

and name will be highlighted.

Select a style.

Use the dial to select the style you want to use.

A list of all the available styles is provided on page 130.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The style rhythm will start playing.

Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop

playback.

Select a Style Rhythm

The currently selected style

• An external style ﬁle loaded into

style number 161 can be

selected and used in the same

way as the internal styles. The

style ﬁle must be loaded into

style number 161 after transfer-

ring it to the instrument from a

computer, or after connecting a

USB ﬂash memory device con-

taining the style ﬁle to the instru-

ment. File transfer instructions

can be found on page 104, and

load instructions are provided

on page 97.

NOTE

• Style numbers 131, 143–160

have no rhythm part and there-

fore no rhythm will play if you

use them for the above exam-

ple. For these styles ﬁrst turn

auto accompaniment on as

described on page 26, press the

[START/STOP] button, and the

accompaniment bass and chord

parts will begin playing when

you play a key to the left of the

keyboard split point.

NOTE

Playing Styles

26 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page.

Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accom-

paniment that you can play along with.

Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style.

Turn automatic accompaniment on.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.

Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment

off.

Turn sync start on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on.

● When automatic accompaniment is on ...

The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the

“auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the

accompaniment chords.

Play Along with a Style

This icon appears when

automatic accompani-

ment is on.

• The keyboard split point can be

changed as required: refer to

page 79.

NOTE

Split point (54 : F#2)

Auto accompaniment region

Flashes when sync start

is on.

Playing Styles

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 27

When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a

style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard

split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function

off.

Play a left-hand chord to start the style.

You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords.

This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try play-

ing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point.

The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you

play.

Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody

with your right hand.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback

when you’re done.

You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment.

Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 76.

Try this!

Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 28. These

examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progres-

sions sound good with the styles.

Split point

Auto accompaniment region

Split point

Auto accompaniment region

Playing Styles

28 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords

Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment.

In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord

sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different ﬁngerings of the same

chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge inﬂuence on the overall

feel of the music you play.

On page 26 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital

to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take

your accompaniments to a new level.

On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the

instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively

creating a complete song.

■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Play the scores with the left hand.

Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 26.

* The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simpliﬁed scores that indicate which notes to play to

produce the chord progressions.

—Dance music with simple chords—

This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start

again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending.

Recommended Style

041 Euro Trance

Play to the left of the split point.

Split point

C G Am

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 29

—3-chord boogie-woogie—

This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the

progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords!

—Bossa nova with jazz-style chords—

This progression includes jazzy “two-ﬁve” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When

you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Recommended Style

148 Piano Boogie

Recommended Style

096 Bossa Nova

C C

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Dm CM7

Am A7

FM7

Bm7

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Playing Styles

30 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords:

● Easy Chords

● Standard Chords

The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 26). The keyboard to the left of the

split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area

of the keyboard.

■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you easily play chords in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard using only

one, two, or three ﬁngers.

■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

This method lets you produce accompaniment by

playing chords using normal ﬁngerings in the

accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords

DEFGABCDEF

Split point (default: 54/F#2)

Root notes and the corresponding keys

Accompaniment

range

•To play a major chord

Press the root note of the chord.

Cm7

•To play a minor chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest black key to the left of it.

•To play a seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white key to the left of it.

•To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with the

nearest white and black keys to the left

of it (three keys altogether).

( )

CmM7

CM7

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

Cdim

Cdim7

CmM7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

(

)

(

b13

)

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords]

* Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords

will be recognized without them.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 31

Using Songs

With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a

piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs,

or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the

performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The

songs are organized by category.

In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and brieﬂy

describe the 30 songs provided.

Press the [SONG] button

The song selection display will appear.

The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted.

Select a song.

Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 33.

Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to.

Listen Lesson Record

Song

Select and Listen to a Song

The currently selected song

number and name

• Song ﬁles transferred from a

computer or stored on a USB

ﬂash memory device con-

nected to the instrument can be

selected and used in the same

way as the internal Song (Song

numbers 36–). File transfer

instructions are provided on

page 104.

NOTE

The song highlighted here

can be played

Using Songs

32 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton again.

These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF],

rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song.

When using the song, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo

display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set

to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute.

You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Song start!

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause

PAUSE

Press the pause

button to pause

playback.

REW

Press the fast

reverse button to

rapidly return to an

earlier point in the

song.

Press the fast for-

ward button to rap-

idly skip ahead to

a later point in the

song.

• When an A-B repeat range is

speciﬁed the fast reverse and

forward function will only work

within that range.

NOTE

Change the Song Tempo

Using Songs

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 33

Press the [DEMO] button.

The demo song will start playing. Listen to some of the outstanding instrument voices provided!

The demo song will automatically repeat from the beginning after it has played all the way through.

You can stop demo playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

● Song List

These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature,

songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Sug-

gested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used.

: Includes chord data.

The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the

CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual.

Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

Category No. Name Suggested Uses

Main Demo

1 JetSet

The songs in this category have been created to

give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this

instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with

the various features.

2 Winter Serenade

3Take off

Voice Demo

4 Live! Grand Demo

These songs features some of the instrument’s

many useful voices. They make maximum use of the

characteristics of each voice, and might serve as

inspiration for your own compositions.

5 Live! Orchestra Demo

6 Cool! Rotor Organ Demo

7 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo

8 Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo

Function Demo

9 Hallelujah Chorus

Use these songs to experience some of the

instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for

the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the

performance assistant technology feature.

10 Ave Maria

11 Nocturne op.9-2

Piano Solo

12 For Elise

These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as

lesson songs.

13 Maple Leaf Rag

14 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair

Piano Ensemble

15 Amazing Grace

A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also

well suited for use as lesson songs.

16 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)

17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov.

18 Scarborough Fair

19 Old Folks at Home

Piano

Accompaniment

20 Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403)

When you need to practice backing

(accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to

do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to

play with a band. These songs allow you to practice

backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the

easiest way to master this important skill.

21 Ep Ballad

22 Boogie Woogie

23 Rock Piano

24 Salsa

25 Country Piano

26 Gospel R&B

27 Medium Swing

28 Jazz Waltz

29 Medium Bossa

SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George

David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)

Play the Demo Song

CHORD

Using Songs

34 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

The following three types of songs can be used by the DGX-530/YPG-535.

● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument)................Song numbers 001–030.

● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035.

● External song ﬁles (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–.

* The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 105 for instructions on how

to transfer the songs to the instrument.

The chart below shows the basic processes ﬂow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song

ﬁles from storage to playback.

Types of Songs

Record

(page 58)

Connect

(page 100)

Transfer

(page 104)

Hint! : You can have some-

one play a piece and tempo-

rarily save it in a user bank

as a user song, then save it

as SMF format to the USB

memory from where it can

be used as a lesson song.

Your own

performance

Song Song

Computer USB ﬂash memory

Song Song Song

SMF conversion

Save

Play

DGX-530/YPG-535 Song Stor-

age locations

Flash Memory USB

(036–)

User Songs

(031–035)

Preset Songs

(001–030)

The 30 songs built

into the instrument.

• User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song ﬁle

to SMF and save it to USB ﬂash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing

score display and can be used with the lesson features.

NOTE

• Different ﬂash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song ﬁles

transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the exter-

nal song ﬁle ﬂash memory area, and vice versa.

NOTE

Using Songs

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 35

This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs.

Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs stored in USB ﬂash memory or ﬂash

memory.

And although user songs you record yourself cannot display a score as is, they can be converted to SMF

(Standard MIDI File) format and stored to USB ﬂash memory, from where they can be played with score

display.

Select a song.

Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 31.

Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will

appear.

There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff.

These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of

the score to indicate the current location.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Displaying the Song Score

• Both chords and lyrics will be

shown in single-staff score dis-

play of a song that includes

chord and lyric data.

• When there are many lyrics they

may be displayed in two rows a

measure.

• Some lyrics or chords may be

abbreviated if the selected song

has a lot of lyrics.

• Small notes that are hard to

read may be easier to read after

you use the quantize function

(page 91).

NOTE

Single-staff

Double-staff

Melody score

Marker

Chord

Lyrics

• No lyrics are shown in double-

staff.

NOTE

Using Songs

36 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display.

No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed.

Select a song.

Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2

described on page 31.

Press the [LYRICS] button.

The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the

display.

The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song.

■ Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display

Number Name

016 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans)

020 Against all odds (Collins 0007403)

030 Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore)

Display the Lyrics

• If the lyrics display shows gar-

bled characters, try changing

the display language (page 16).

NOTE

• Songs downloaded from the

Internet or commercially avail-

able song ﬁles, including XF for-

mat ﬁles (page 6), are

compatible with the lyrics dis-

play features as long as they are

standard MIDI ﬁle format ﬁles

containing lyric data. Lyrics dis-

play may not be possible with

some ﬁles.

NOTE

Song title, lyricist,

and composer.

Lyrics and chord

display

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 37

The Easy Way to Play Piano

This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature

that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even

though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any

notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the

results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and

can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun.

Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results

for you.

● Chord...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-bal-

anced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play

anything with both your left and right hands.

● Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with left-

hand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the

left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to

support the melody you are playing with your right hand.

● Melody ................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any

keys with just one ﬁnger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve

never played a keyboard instrument before!

● Chord/Melody .... Play the melody of the selected song with one ﬁnger on the right-hand

section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the

keyboard using the Chord type.

Refer to page 46 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play.

Split point

Play your own melody with the right hand.

Split point

The Easy Way to Play Piano

38 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature

is on.

Select the CHORD type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the

Chord type by using the dial.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a

song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave

Maria”.

When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song

can be seen in the display!

● What is a Song?

You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term

“Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance

assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should

always be used with a song (page 31).

CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands

Hold for longer than a second

Select Chord

• Using Songs (page 31)

NOTE

The song displayed here will

be played.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 39

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for

four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin play-

ing yourself from the ﬁfth measure. The keys you should play will be

shown in the display.

Play on the keyboard.

Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the

same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at

measure ﬁve the notes will come out according to the score on the right.

Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will

continue to “correct” the notes that you play.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord type.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance

assistant technology feature off.

Before After

• The score for Ave Maria is pro-

vided on page 120.

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

40 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature

is on.

Select the CHORD/FREE type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the

Chord/Free type by using the dial.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a

song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Noc-

turne”.

CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only

Hold for longer than a second

Select

Chord/Free

• Using Songs (page 31)

NOTE

The song displayed here will

be played.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 41

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display.

Play on the keyboard.

Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of

the split point with your left hand.

Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an F-

A-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the

display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your

left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type.

Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand

part in the display.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance

assistant technology feature off.

Split point

With this type notes played on the

left-hand side of the split point will

actually sound an octave higher.

• The score for Nocturne is pro-

vided on page 122.

NOTE

The Easy Way to Play Piano

42 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

See page 46 for some hints on how to play melodies.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature

is on.

Select the MELODY type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Mel-

ody type by using the dial.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a

song by using the dial.

MELODY Type—Play with One Finger

Select Melody

Hold for longer than a second

• Using Songs (page 31)

NOTE

The song displayed here will

be played.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 43

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not

sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5).

Play on the keyboard.

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one ﬁn-

ger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If

you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE]

button to call up the melody score in the display.

How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one ﬁnger

thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type!

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance

assistant technology feature off.

Song start!

Sounds like a

melody!

The Easy Way to Play Piano

44 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.

This turns on the performance assistant technology feature.

The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature

is on.

Select the CHORD/MELODY type.

Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so

that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the

Chord/Melody type by using the dial.

Select a song.

Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a

song by using the dial.

CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right

Select

Chord/Melody

Hold for longer than a second

• Using Songs (page 31)

NOTE

The song displayed here will

be played.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 45

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Song playback will begin.

The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memoriz-

ing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth mea-

sure.

Play on the keyboard.

Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of

the split point with your left hand.

Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand.

You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split

point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases

with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song

melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your

left hand.

This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type.

If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the

[SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display.

You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance

assistant technology feature off.

Split point

With this type notes played on the

left-hand side of the split point will

actually sound an octave higher.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

46 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro!

Here are a few hints for using the Chord type.

If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the

keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the left-

hand section of the keyboard.

To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands

spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately

with your left and right hands (any notes will do).

How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you

play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type!

Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of

playing produce different results.

Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a

melody with your right ... or any other combination.

The chord information

included in the song is

displayed in the lower

area of the MAIN display.

You will get even better

results if you match your

left-hand rhythm to rhythm

of the chord indicator in

the display.

Sounds like you’re

playing the right

notes!

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 1.

● Play with the left and right hands

at the same timing—type 2.

● Play alternately with the left

and right hands—type 3.

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

Play 1 note at a time with your right

hand (for example: index ﬁnger

→

middle ﬁnger

→

ring ﬁnger).

Play 3 notes at once

with your right hand.

The Easy Way to Play Piano

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 47

Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type.

If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen

score feature.

Displaying the Score.

After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 42, press the [SCORE] button.

The melody score will appear.

The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback.

If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score

you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm.

● Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology.

When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that

include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only

work with songs that include melody data. In order to ﬁnd out if a song includes the required data, ﬁrst

select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the

[SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If

melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any

combination type that includes the Melody type.

● External Songs and the performance assistant technology.

Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as

long as they include the required chord and/or melody data.

See page 105 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument.

Chord

Marker

Melody

Play while watching the

marker

48 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Select a Song For a Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite

You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or

both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0)

downloaded from the Internet and saved to ﬂash memory. (page 104)

During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can

even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you

can handle. It’s never too late to start learning!

Lesson Flow:

Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category!

The practice methods:

● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes.

● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing.

● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song.

Select the

song you want

to learn.

Select the part you want

to work on (right hand,

left hand, both ha

nds).

Select lesson

1, 2, or 3.

Lesson

start!

Select a Song For a Lesson

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 49

In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you

play the right note.

Select a song for your lesson.

Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want

to use for your lesson. As listed on page 33 there are a variety of song

types.

Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Select the part you want to practice.

Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand

lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-

hands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right cor-

ner of the display.

Lesson 1—Waiting

Select R for right-hand lesson.

Select L for left-hand lesson.

Select LR for bothhands lesson.

Select a Song For a Lesson

50 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Start Lesson 1.

Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the

LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in

sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... An

explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few

seconds before the lesson begins.

Song playback will begin automatically when you select

Lesson 1.

Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played

is indicated by a dot (●) on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen

keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the

next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the

correct note. The triangular marker (▼) above the score indicates play-

back progress.

• If the score display is not ready

by the time the explanation dis-

play disappears, prepare-in-

progress message will appear

on the display until the score is

ready.

NOTE

(Lesson 1)

(Lesson 2)

(Lesson 3)

(Song Lesson off)

In this case the “R1” indicates that right-

hand lesson 1 has been selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

▼ Marker

● Marker

Select a Song For a Lesson

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 51

Stop the Lesson mode

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2.

■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again

from the beginning.

● Shifting the keyboard left or right.

The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by

pressing the [+] or [-] button.

61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. The DGX-530/

YPG-535 actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or

low notes, those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be

shown on the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or

right of the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard

left or right so you can see the notes (the ● marker will appear on the

appropriate key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the

keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson.

The displayed range (61 keys)

Actual keyboard range (DGX-530/YPG-535 = 88 keys)

When the lesson song has played all the way

through your performance will be evaluated in 4

levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent.

“Excellent!” is the highest evaluation.

• The evaluation feature can be

turned off via the FUNCTION

Grade item (page 91).

NOTE

Select a Song For a Lesson

52 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed

you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own

pace.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

3 on page 49).

Start Lesson 2.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is

selected.

The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to

indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct

timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo

will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original

tempo.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3.

Lesson 2—Your Tempo

In this case the “R2” indicates

that right-hand lesson 2 has

been selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

Play while following the

score marker

Select a Song For a Lesson

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 53

Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you

have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song.

Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and

3 on page 49).

Start Lesson 3.

Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are

selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Les-

son 1 ...

Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is

selected.

Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard

marker in the display will indicate the notes to play.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button.

Lesson 3—Minus One

In this case the “R3” indicates

that right-hand lesson 3 has

been selected.

Left-hand part Right-hand part

(In the case of a right-hand lesson)

▼ Marker

● Marker

Select a Song For a Lesson

54 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to

repeatedly practice a section you ﬁnd difﬁcult.

Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson.

The song location will move back four measures from the point at

which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-mea-

sure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you

pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four mea-

sures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all

you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you

make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it

right

Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn

•You can change the number of

measures the Repeat and learn

function jumps back by pressing

a number button [1]–[9] during

repeat playback.

NOTE

Press imme-

diately

Oops!

A mistake!

e Jump back 4 measures and

repeat playback

Song playback

direction

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 55

Play Using the Music Database

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to

select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ...

simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel

settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of

sounds and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database list will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 131 of

the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that

matches the image of the song you intend to play.

For this example select the “158 Patrol”.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your

right.

The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the

left of the split point (page 26). Refer to pages 28–30 for information

about playing chords.

If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this

point you can check the assigned voice and style.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

• Music Database (MDB) ﬁles

transferred from a computer or

stored on a USB ﬂash memory

device connected to the instru-

ment can be selected and used

in the same way as the internal

Music Databases (MDB num-

bers 301–). File transfer instruc-

tions are provided on page 104.

NOTE

Split Point

56 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Change a Song’s Style

In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to

play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you

can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova,

as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by

changing the style with which a song is played.

You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for

a complete change of image.

You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song.

Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009

Hallelujah Chorus.” Press the [START/STOP] button begin

playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song

Arranger feature will appear on the display.

As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall

image of the song.

Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other

songs as well—any songs that include chord data.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name

and number will be highlighted.

Select a Song.

Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange.

Try Out the Easy Song Arranger

• The score for Hallelujah Chorus

is provided on page 118.

NOTE

Using the Easy Song Arranger

The currently selected song

number and name are dis-

played here.

Change a Song’s Style

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 57

Listen to the song.

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move

on to the next step while the song is playing.

Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button.

The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name

and number will be highlighted.

Select a style.

Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles.

As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only

the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to

the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the

song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button).

Select a voice part.

If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a

voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be

selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button.

Select a voice you want to play as a song melody.

Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody

voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice

changes (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the

[START/STOP] button).

• When playing song numbers

010, 011, and 020 to 030 while

using the Easy Song Arranger,

melody tracks will be automati-

cally muted and no melody will

sound. In order to hear the mel-

ody tracks you will need to press

the SONG MEMORY buttons [3]

to [5].

NOTE

Song start!

The currently selected style

number and name are dis-

played here.

• Because the Easy Song

Arranger uses song data you

can’t specify chords by playing

in the accompaniment range of

the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/

OFF] button will not function.

• If the time signature of the song

and style are different, the time

signature of the song will be

used.

NOTE

Hold for longer than a second

The Melody R and Melody

L displays will be selected

alternately each time you

press the [VOICE] button.

The currently selected mel-

ody voice will be displayed.

• The Difference Between

MELODY R and MELODY

L ...

Songs are a combination of a

melody and an auto-accompani-

ment style. Normally “melody”

refers to the right-hand part, but

in this instrument “melody” parts

are provided for both the right

and left hands. MELODY R is

the melody part played by the

right hand, and MELODY L is

the melody part played by the

left hand.

NOTE

58 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Record Your Own Performance

You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as

user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved

as user songs, they can be converted to SMF (Standard MID File) for-

mat ﬁles and saved to USB ﬂash memory (page 96) and used with

score display. So when inspiration strikes and you create a great mel-

ody, you can save it in both listenable and written score form.

■ Recordable Data

You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track.

Each track can be recorded individually.

● Melody Track [1]–[5]...........Record the melody parts.

● Style Track [A] ....................Records the chord part.

To record your own performance, ﬁrst use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the

track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later.

• Up to approximately 10,000

notes can be recorded for the

ﬁve user songs if you record

only to the melody tracks. Up to

approximately 5,500 chord

changes can be recorded for

the ﬁve user songs if you record

only to the style track.

• User songs cannot display a

score as is, but they can be con-

verted to SMF (Standard MIDI

File) format and stored to USB

ﬂash memory (page 96), from

which they can be played with

score display.

NOTE

Track Configuration

• Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody

part (MELODY R)

• Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody

part (MELODY L)

• Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” perfor-

mance data.

• Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accom-

paniment) part.

• The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L ...

Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accom-

paniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand

part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for

both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody

part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the mel-

ody part played by the left hand.

NOTE

Melody Chords

Specify

track(s) and

record

Tra ck

Right-hand

melody

Left-hand

melody

Other perfor-

mance data

Style

The parts played by each track

when a user song is played back.

Record Your Own Performance

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 59

From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use

the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you

want to record to.

Select the track(s) you want to record to and conﬁrm your

selection on the display.

◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track

Together

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button.

The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display.

◆ Record a Melody track

Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while hold-

ing the [REC] button.

The selected track will be highlighted in the display.

To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a sec-

ond time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while

recording is in progress.

Recording Procedure

Rotate the dial to select a

song number between 031

and 035.

• If you record to track that con-

tains previously-recorded

data the previous data will be

overwritten and lost.

CAUTION

• Style accompaniment is auto-

matically turned on when you

select the style track [A] for

recording.

• Style accompaniment cannot

turned on or off while recording

is in progress.

NOTE

Press and hold

• If style accompaniment is on

and track [A] has not yet been

recorded, the style track [A] will

automatically be selected for

recording when a melody track

is selected. If you only want to

record a melody track, be sure

to turn the style track [A] off.

NOTE

Record Your Own Performance

60 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Recording will start when you play on the keyboard.

You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

The current measure will be shown on the display during recording.

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC]

button.

If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style

track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will

stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to

001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a

box border.

When the recording is done ...

◆ To Play Back a User Song

User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 31).

1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display.

2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial

to select the user song (031–035) you want to play.

3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback.

◆ To Save a User Song to USB ﬂash memory ➔ page 95

◆ To save a User Song to USB ﬂash memory in SMF format

➔ page 96.

● To Record Other Tracks

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks.

By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5],

[A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded

tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute

previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display)

while recording new tracks.

● To Re-record a Track

Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal

way.

The new material will overwrite the previous data.

• If the memory becomes full dur-

ing recording a warning mes-

sage will appear and recording

will stop automatically. Use the

song clear or track clear (page

61) function to delete unwanted

data and make more room avail-

able for recording, then do the

recording again.

NOTE

Recording

starts

Current measure

Record Your Own Performance

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 61

This function clears an entire user song (all tracks).

From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you

want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer

than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the song.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the song is being cleared.

● Data that cannot be recorded

• Split voice

• The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes

made during the song will not be recorded.

Reverb type, Chorus type, Time signature, Style number, Style volume,

Tempo (When the style track is recorded)

Song Clear—Deleting User Songs

• If you only want to clear a spe-

ciﬁc track from a user song use

the Track Clear function.

NOTE

Hold for longer than a second

Press and hold

•To execute the Song Clear func-

tion press the [+] button. Press

[-] to cancel the Song Clear

operation.

NOTE

Record Your Own Performance

62 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

This function lets you delete a speciﬁed track from a user song.

From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you

want to clear.

Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5],

[A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for

longer than a second.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

Press the [+] button.

A conﬁrmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [+] button to clear the track.

The clear-in-progress message will appear brieﬂy on the display while

the track is being cleared.

Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song

Hold for longer than a second

•To execute the Track Clear func-

tion press the [+] button. Press

[-] to cancel the Track Clear

operation.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 63

Backup and Initialization

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you

want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below.

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s ﬂash memory and restores the initial default set-

tings. The following initialization procedures are provided.

■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear data backed up to the internal ﬂash memory—panel user set-

ting, registration memory, user songs, style ﬁle—turn the power on by

pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white

key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default

values restored.

■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To clear song, style and music database ﬁles that have been transferred

to the internal ﬂash memory from a computer, turn the power on by

pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the

highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys.

● The Backup Parameters

• User Songs

• Style Files

•Registration Memory

• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume,

Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection,

Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fingering

Backup

Initialization

• When you execute the Flash

Clear operation, data you

have purchased will also be

cleared. Be sure to save data

you want to keep to a com-

puter.

CAUTION

64 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Overall DGX-530/YPG-535 control is based on the following simple operations.

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

Basic Operation

1 Press a button to select a basic function.

2 Use the dial to select an item or value.

3 Start a function.

Display (pages 66, 67)

● Volume Adjustment

Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the

instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones

plugged into the PHONES jack.

Rotate counter-

clockwise to lower

the volume.

Rotate clockwise to

increase the vol-

ume.

3 Start a function. 2 Select an item or value.1 Select a basic function.

Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson.

Select an auto-accompaniment style.

Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard.

Basic Operation

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 65

2 Use the dial to select an item or value

When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display.

You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item.

■Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3 Start a function.

This is the [START/STOP] button.

Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE]

button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm).

The currently selected item is high-

lighted in the display. In this example the

[VOICE] button has been pressed.

● Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to

increase the value of the selected

item, or counterclockwise to

decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial

continuously to continuously

increase or decrease the value.

● [+] and [-] Buttons

Press the [+] button brieﬂy to incre-

ment the value by 1, or press the [-]

button brieﬂy to decrement the

value by 1. Press and hold either

button to continuously increment or

decrement the value in the corre-

sponding direction.

● Number Buttons [0]–[9]

The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song num-

ber or parameter value.

Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see

below).

Decrease Increase

Press brieﬂy

to decre-

ment.

Press brieﬂy

to incre-

ment.

Example: Song number “003”

can be entered in three ways.

• [0] → [0] → [3]

• [0] → [3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

• [3]

(“003” will appear on the dis-

play after a brief delay)

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [3].

● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ]

buttons

When selecting a song, style, or voice,

you can use these buttons to jump to the

ﬁrst item in the next or previous cate-

gory.

The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for select-

ing categorized items, as in the example below.

Example: VOICE SELECT Display

In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if

you ﬁrst use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select

the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or

[+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly

handy when you have to select from a large number of voices.

Jump to the ﬁrst item

in the next or previ-

ous category.

The ﬁrst voice in the selected

category is selected.

Select the category shown

here.

CATEGORY button [ ] mark.

In most procedures described throughout this owner’s

manual the dial is recommended for selection simply

because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection

method. Please note however, that most items or values

that can be selected using the dial can also be selected

using the [+] and [-] buttons.

Basic Operation

66 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

● Display Names

All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for differ-

ent modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display.

● MAIN Display

● FUNCTION Display (page 89)

The FUNCTION display provides access to 46 utility functions.

The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you

can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 65) to select 46 different groups of functions. Press the

CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the

dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required.

To Return To the MAIN Display

Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN

display.

You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the

[EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel.

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that

the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call

up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a

range of functions.

The Displays

Title

Function item

Value

Basic Operation

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 67

The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice.

It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions.

MAIN Display Items

* Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on

the rear panel of the instrument for opti-

mum display legibility.

Transpose

Tempo

A-B Repeat

Appears when repeat

playback is engaged.

Measure Number

Function ON/Off Icons

Dual

Appears when the Dual Voice is

on. When this icon is showing a

second voice is “layered” on and

played with the main voice.

Split

Appears when the Split Voice is

on. When this icon is showing

different voices can be played to

the left and right of the keyboard

split point.

Performance assistant technology

Appears when the performance

assistant technology is on.

Harmony

Appears when Harmony is on.

When this icon is showing har-

mony notes will be added to the

main voice.

File Control

When this icon is showing you

can control ﬁle operations.

Chord

Display

Style (Auto-accompaniment)

Status (page 26)

Appears when the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button is pressed to turn

accompaniment on after selecting

a style. When showing the key-

board range to the left of the split

point is used for accompaniment

chord recognition.

Appears when the synchro-stop

function is engaged.

The style pattern name.

Registration Memory

Status (page 87)

Shows the selected bank

number.

Shows the memory num-

bers that contain data. A

border appears around

the selected number.

Song Track Status

(pages 58, 86)

Highlighted during user song

recording.

The track(s) selected for

recording are highlighted dur-

ing user-song recording. Only

tracks that contain data are dis-

played. A border appears

around a selected track that

contains data. No border

appears around a Muted track.

68 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Play with a Variety of Effects

This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice.

Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button

to turn Harmony feature on.

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY

ON/OFF] button again.

Press and hold the [HARMONY] button

for longer than a second.

The currently selected harmony type will be

displayed.

Use the dial to select a harmony type.

Refer to the

Effect Type List

on page 133 for

information about the available harmony types.

Try playing the keyboard with the harmony

function. The effect and operation of each Har-

mony Type is different-refer to the below section

“How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as

the Effect Type List for details.

Adding Harmony

When harmony

is on the har-

mony icon will

appear in the

display.

• When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature

on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main

voice is automatically selected.

NOTE

Hold for longer than

a second.

The currently selected harmony type

• The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual

or Split Voices.

• The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony

notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

● How to sound each Harmony Type

• Harmony type 01 to 05

• Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill)

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the

Auto Accompaniment is on (page 26).

Hold down two

keys.

• Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo)

• Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo)

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function

Settings (page 91).

Keep holding

down the keys.

Keep holding

down the keys.

Reference

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 69

Play with a Variety of Effects

Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience.

When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you

want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on

page 133 for information about the available reverb types.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Reverb Type item.

Use the dial to select a reverb type.

You can check how the selected reverb type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

Refer to the Effect Type List on page 133 for

information about the available reverb types.

● Adjusting the Reverb Level

You can individually adjust the amount of reverb

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

(See page 90).

Adding Reverb

Reverb Type item

Selected reverb type.

70 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Play with a Variety of Effects

The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison.

When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If

you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Chorus Type item.

Use the dial to select a chorus type.

You can check how the selected chorus type

sounds by playing on the keyboard.

● Adjusting the Chorus Level

You can individually adjust the amount of chorus

that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices.

(See page 90).

Adding Chorus

Chorus Type item

Selected chorus type.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 71

Play with a Variety of Effects

This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all

times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Sustain item.

The current setting is displayed.

You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons

to turn panel sustain on or off.

The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll

the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch.

If you use this feature with a voice such as the “045 Overdriven” guitar voice (page 17), you can produce

remarkably realistic string-bending effects.

You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 90.

Panel Sustain

• The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the

panel sustain function is turned on.

NOTE

Pitch Bend

72 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times

for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song

playback by pressing the button just twice.

You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Touch Sensitivity

item.

The currently selected touch sensitivity will be

displayed.

Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity

setting between 1 and 3. Higher values

produce greater (easier) volume varia-

tion in response to keyboard dynamics

—i.e. greater sensitivity.

A setting of “4” results in a ﬁxed touch

response, or no level change no matter how

hard or how soft you play the keys.

Tap Start

Touch Response Sensitivity

Touch Sensitivity item

• The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 73

Handy Performance Features

Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting

feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select

voice number “000” to activate this feature.

Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2

on page 17).

Select and play back any song (steps 1

to 3 on page 31).

Play the keyboard and remember the

sound of the voice.

If you have stopped playback at some point

during this procedure press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback again.

Use the dial to change songs, then play

the keyboard and listen to the voice.

You should hear a different keyboard voice

than you played in step 3. Watch the display

while changing songs and you will see that dif-

ferent voices are selected for each song.

One Touch Setting

Use the dial to select

voice number 000.

74 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Handy Performance Features

Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listen-

ing through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external

speaker system.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

The currently selected function will appear in

the display.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons as many times as necessary to

select the master EQ type function

“Master EQ Type”.

The currently selected EQ type will appear.

Use the dial to select the desired Master

EQ setting.

Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and

2 are best for listening via the instrument’s

built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones,

and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via

external speakers.

Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound

The currently selected

master EQ type.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 75

Handy Performance Features

◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose)

The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone

increments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Transpose item.

Use the dial to set the transpose value

between -12 and +12 as required.

◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning)

The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted

up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent

increments (100 cents = 1 semitone).

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Tuning item.

Use the dial to set the tuning value

between -100 and +100 as required.

Pitch Controls

Transpose item

Can be set between -12 and +12

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

Can be set between -100 and +100

Tuning item

• The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed.

NOTE

76 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 25 of

the Quick Guide.

Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment proce-

dure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more.

The DGX-530/YPG-535 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement

of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing.

● INTRO section

This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro ﬁnishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the

main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

● MAIN section

This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats

indeﬁnitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A

and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left

hand.

● Fill-in section

This is automatically added before changing to section A or B.

● ENDING section

This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompaniment stops

automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Pattern Variation (Sections)

Main A/BIntro

Auto ﬁllEnding

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 77

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Press the [STYLE] button and then

select a style.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to

turn auto accompaniment on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

synchro start on.

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

You’re now ready to play the intro.

As soon as you play a chord with your

left hand, the Intro of the selected Style

starts.

For this example, play a C major chord (as

shown below). For information on how to enter

chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment

Chords” on page 30.

● Synchro Start

When the synchro start standby mode is engaged,

style playback will begin as soon as you play a

chord in the accompaniment range of the

keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start

standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START]

button again.

Appears when auto

accompaniment is on.

The indicator will ﬂash when the

synchro start standby mode will

be engaged.

The name of the selected sec-

tion—MAIN A or MAIN B—will

be displayed.

Split point

Accompaniment range

78 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

When the ﬁll-in is ﬁnished, it leads smoothly

into the selected main section A/B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

This switches to the ending section.

When the ending is ﬁnished, the auto accompa-

niment stops automatically. You can have the

ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by

pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button

again while the ending is playing back.

● Synchro Stop

When this function is selected the accompaniment

style will only play while you are playing chords

in the accompaniment range of the keyboard.

Style playback will stop when you release the

keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC

STOP] button.

The style will play

while you are playing

the keys

Style playback will

stop when you

release the keys

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 79

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the

procedure described below.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Split point item.

Use the dial to set the split point to any

key from 000 (C-2) through 127 (G8).

Setting the Split Point

Split point (54 : F#2)

Main voice

Split voice

• When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point

also changes.

• The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson.

• The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played.

NOTE

•You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION]

button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the

item (page 89).

NOTE

80 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play

chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the

accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord ﬁngerings recognized by the

instrument can be used (page 30).

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

auto accompaniment on after pressing the

[STYLE] button.

Press the [STYLE] button to engage the

style function.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Style Volume item.

Use the dial to set the style volume

between 000 and 127.

Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment)

Appears when auto

accompaniment is

Accompaniment range

Adjusting the Style Volume

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 81

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”.

The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the

root, third, and ﬁfth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad,

for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the

C major scale), and G (the ﬁfth note of the C major scale).

In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the

chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for

the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and

anchors the other chord notes.

The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third.

The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad

is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two addi-

tional chords, as shown below.

The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create

different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by

choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”).

● Reading Chord Names

Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord

(other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the

chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a

major or ﬂatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance.

● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the DGX-530/YPG-535.)

Chord Basics

3rd

Root

Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones)

CM Cm Caug Cdim

Major chord

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Major 3rd

Minor 3rd

Minor chord Augmented chord Diminished chord

Root note Chord type

Csus4 C7 Cm7 CM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

C7sus4

CmM7

Perfect 5

Perfect 4

Flatted 7

Major chord Flatted 7

Minor chord Major 7

Major chord

Major 7

Minor chord Flatted 5

chord

Flatted 5

Minor 7

chord

Flatted 7

Suspended

chord

Suspended 4

Minor 7

Major 7

, suspended 4

Minor 7

, ﬂatted 5

Minor/major 7

82 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

■Recognized Standard Chords● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords.

* These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Display

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5 C

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5 C

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 C6

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 CM7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7

#11

Flatted ﬁfth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5C

Major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 CM7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5 Csus4

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 CM7aug *

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm9

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 Cm6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7Cm7

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) Cm7

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 CmM7

Minor seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7Cm7

Minor major seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 CmM7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh ﬂatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh add ﬂatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7C7

b13

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

#11

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7C7

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7C7

Seventh ﬂatted ﬁfth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7C7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7C7sus4

Suspended second [sus2] 1 - 2 - 5 Csus2 *

(

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

CM7

(

#11

)

(

)

CM7

(

)

Csus4

Caug

CM7aug

(

)

Cm6

Cm7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cm7

(

)

CmM7

(

)

Cdim

Cdim7

(

)

(

b13

)

(

)

(

#11

)

(

)

(

)

C7b5

C7aug

C7sus4

Csus2

• Notes in parentheses can be omitted.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompa-

niment based only on the root.

•A perfect ﬁfth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root

and ﬁfth which can be used with both major and minor chords.

• The chord ﬁngerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions

can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4,

aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2.

NOTE

•Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the

notes shown in parentheses are omitted.

• The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related

chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the

minor seventh).

•Two-note ﬁngerings will produce a chord based on the previously played

chord.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 83

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

This instrument features 160 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and

others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” sufﬁx), can be loaded into style

number 161 and used in the same way as the internal styles. For details on loading the style ﬁle, see “Load-

ing User Files and Style Files” on page 97.

In order to load a style ﬁle it is necessary to ﬁrst either transfer the style ﬁle to the instrument from a com-

puter, or connect a USB ﬂash memory containing the style ﬁle to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Refer to

“Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer” on page 102 for details on the ﬁle transfer proce-

dure. If you use a USB ﬂash memory refer to “Loading User Files and Style Files” on page 97.

In “Play Along with a Style” on page 26 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were

detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however,

chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even

more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 30) can be

detected.

Press the [CHORD FINGERING] button

to select the function “Chord Finger-

ing”.

Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”.

Style File

Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard

84 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords.

It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

Press and hold the LESSON [START]

button for longer than a second.

As an example, we’ll learn how to play a

GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the

“G” key in the section of the keyboard

labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The root note you set is shown

in the display.

Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in

the section of the keyboard labeled

“CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t

sound.) The notes you should play for

the speciﬁed chord (root note and

chord type) are shown in the display,

both as notation and in the keyboard

diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord,

press the [+]/[-] buttons.

Try playing a chord in the auto accom-

paniment section of the keyboard,

checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly,

a bell sound signals your success and

the chord name in the display ﬂash.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

Hold for longer than a second

Notation of chord Chord name (root and type)

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only

by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when

specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after

pressing the root note.

• Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand

notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the per-

formance assistant technology feature.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 85

Song Settings

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Song Volume item.

Use the dial to set the song volume

between 000 and 127.

You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the

start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat

playback.

Play the song (page 31) and press the

[A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning

of the section you want to repeat (the

“A” point).

Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec-

ond time at the end of the section you

want to repeat (the “B” point).

The speciﬁed A-B section of the song

will now play repeatedly.

You can stop repeat playback at any time by

pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

Song Volume

Can be set between 000 and 127

Song volume item

• Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected.

NOTE

A-B Repeat

• The repeat start and end points can be speciﬁed in one-measure

increments.

• The current measure number is shown in the display during play-

back.

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song

press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song.

NOTE

86 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Song Settings

Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the

song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc.

You can mute individual tracks and play the muted

part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute

tracks other than the ones you want to listen to.

Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons

to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The

border around the track number in the display dis-

appears when that track is muted.

Refer to page 58 for information about the song

track conﬁguration.

You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer.

Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simul-

taneously so that “LR” appears in the

upper right corner of the MAIN display.

Select the song and play it.

Press the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second.

The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MEL-

ODY L) display will appear so you can select

the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the

[VOICE] button alternates between VOICE

SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L.

Use the dial to select the voice.

As you select different melody voices, only the

melody voice changes while the song will

remain the same.

Muting Independent Song Parts

Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted.

No track number ... no data.

Track number without border

... track contains data but is muted.

Change the Melody Voice

•You cannot change the melody voice of a user song.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 87

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite set-

tings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved

(8 banks of two setups each).

Set the panel controls as required—

select a voice, accompaniment style,

etc.

Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A

bank number will appear in the display

when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select a bank number from 1 to

Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2]

button while holding the [MEMORY/

BANK] button to store the current panel

settings to the speciﬁed registration

memory.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display in order to check the bank and registra-

tion memory numbers.

8 Banks

Memory 1

Up to 16 presets (eight

banks of two each) can

be memorized.

Memory 2

Saving to the Registration Memory

Bank number

• Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song play-

back.

NOTE

Bank number

•You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration

memory button into USB ﬂash memory as the user ﬁle or to a com-

puter as the backup ﬁle.

NOTE

• If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains

data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data.

NOTE

• Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registra-

tion memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost.

CAUTION

88 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings

Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A

bank number will appear in the display

when you release the button.

Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but-

tons to select bank you want to recall.

You can check whether the panel settings are

stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by press-

ing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1]

or [2], containing the settings you want

to recall. The panel controls will be

instantly set accordingly.

Recalling a Registration Memory

Bank number

● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registra-

tion Memory

• Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF,

Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B),

Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering

• Voice settings

Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume,

Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level),

Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice

number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level),

Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF,

Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan,

Reverb Level, Chorus Level)

• Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type,

Panel Sustain ON/OFF

• Harmony settings

Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type,

Harmony Volume

• Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range

* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when

using the Song features.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 89

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tun-

ing, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the func-

tion list starting on the opposite page. There are 46 function parameters in all.

When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display

name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required.

Find the function you want to set in the

list that begins on page 90.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Select a function.

Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as

many times as necessary until the function’s

display name appears in the display.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

selected function as required.

The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/

OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF.

In some cases the [+] button will initiate execu-

tion of the selected function, and the [-] will

cancel the selection.

Some Function settings are stored in memory

as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup

Parameters” on page 63 for information on the

function settings that are stored on the instru-

ment. To restore all initial factor default set-

tings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure

described in the “Initialization” section on page

63.

Selecting and Setting Functions

Previous itemFunction category Next item

The selected function

Value

Direct numeric

entry.

• Increment value by 1.

•ON

•Execute

• Decrement value by 1.

• OFF

• Cancel

Press simultaneously to

recall the default setting.

90 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

The Functions

● Function Setting List

Category Function Item Range/Settings Description

VOLUME

Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style.

Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song.

OVERALL

Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments.

Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments.

Pitch Bend Range 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments.

Split Point 000–127(C-2–G8)

Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in

other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper)

voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are

automatically set to the same value.

Touch Sensitivity

1(Soft), 2(Medium),

3(Hard), 4 (Off)

Determines the sensitivity of the feature.

Chord Fingering

1(Multi Finger),

2(FullKeyboard)

Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal

chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In

the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard

will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well.

MAIN VOICE

Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice.

Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice.

Main Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results

in the sound being panned full right.

Main Reverb Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Main Chorus Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

DUAL VOICE

Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice.

Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.

Dual Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results

in the sound being panned full right.

Dual Reverb Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb

effect.

Dual Chorus Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

SPLIT VOICE

Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice.

Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.

Split Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The

value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results

in the sound being panned full right.

Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect.

Split Chorus Level 000–127

Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus

effect.

EFFECT

Reverb Type 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 133)

Chorus Type 1–5 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 133)

Sustain ON/OFF

Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to the MAIN/

DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not

applied when OFF. (page 71)

Master EQ Type

1(Speaker 1),

2(Speaker 2),

3(Headphones),

4(Line Out 1),

5(Line Out 2)

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in

different listening situations.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 91

The Functions

* All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously.

(The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.)

HARMONY

Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 133)

Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

PAT P.A.T. Type

CHORD,

CHORD/FREE,

MELODY,

CHORD/MELODY

Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list

on page 37)

PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 102).

MIDI

Local ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone

generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 102)

External Clock ON/OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock

(OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 102)

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is

transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF

Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF

Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF)

during Song playback.

Initial Setup YES/NO

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to

send, or press [-] to cancel.

METRONOME

Time Signature -

Numerator

00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature -

Denominator

2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat.

Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

SCORE Quantize

1(1/4 note),

2(1/4 note triplet),

3(1/8 note),

4(1/8 note triplet),

5(1/16 note),

6(1/16 note triplet),

7(1/32 note),

8(1/32 note triplet)

Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by

adjusting the timing of the notes.

This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For

example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you

should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this

value will not be shown in the score.

LESSON

Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting

is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.

Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is

only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer.

Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

UTILITY Demo Cancel ON/OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON,

the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed.

LANGUAGE Language English/Japanese

Determines the display language for the demo displays, song ﬁle names,

lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are

displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the ﬁle names are

displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language

setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting

exists, the setting here is used.

Category Function Item Range/Settings Description

92 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Using USB Flash Memory

USB ﬂash memory is a memory medium used for storing data.

When a USB ﬂash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,

user songs created on the instrument and the registered settings can be saved to or

loaded from the memory medium. USB ﬂash memory can also be used to transfer song

data downloaded from the Internet to the instrument, where it can be used with the per-

formance assistant technology (page 37) and Lesson (page 48) features described in

the Quick Guide. Furthermore, user songs saved to USB ﬂash memory in MIDI ﬁle for-

mat can also be used with these features.

In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB ﬂash

memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them.

Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO

DEVICE terminal” section on page 93, and the “Using USB Storage Devices” section on

page 93.

Connect a USB ﬂash memory to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful

to insert it with the proper orientation.

Check that the ﬁle control icon is shown

in the MAIN display.

You can go to the FILE CONTROL display

from which you can access USB ﬂash memory

operations by pressing the [MENU] button

from this display.

(Do not press this button now, but only when

instructed to in the sections below.)

Connecting a USB Flash Memory

A message (information or conﬁrmation

dialog) sometimes appears on the display to

facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages”

on page 116 for an explanation of each

message.

Menu Reference Page

Format 94

Save 95

SMF Save 96

Load 97

Delete 98

File Control

Icon

Appears while

the memory

device is being

mounted.

• No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE

CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related

to ﬁle functions will be active.

• The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following

cases:

• During style or song playback.

• During a lesson.

• While data is being loaded from a USB ﬂash memory.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 93

Using USB Flash Memory

■ Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal

This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to

handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below.

● Compatible USB devices

• USB storage devices (ﬂash memory, ﬂoppy disk drive)

The instrument does not necessarily support all commer-

cially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee

operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before pur-

chasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please

visit the following web page:

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

● Connecting USB device

• When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE

terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is

appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direc-

tion.

• Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard,

you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with

the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is

that of USB 1.1.

● Using USB Storage Devices

By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you

can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as

well as read data from the connected device.

The number of USB storage device to be used

Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Formatting USB storage media

When a USB storage device is connected or media is

inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format

the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page

94).

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased,

apply the write-protect provided with each storage device

or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device,

make sure to disable write-protect.

Connecting/removing USB storage device

Before removing the media from the device, make sure that

the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save

and Delete operations).

•For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

NOTE

• Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse can-

not be used.

NOTE

• Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instru-

ment, they cannot be used for saving data.

NOTE

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not

contain important data.

CAUTION

•Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage

device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often.

Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument

“freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing

data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format opera-

tions) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after

the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT

remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the

power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on

either or both devices.

CAUTION

94 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Using USB Flash Memory

New USB ﬂash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument.

After connecting the USB ﬂash memory

to be formatted to the instrument’s USB

TO DEVICE terminal, check that the

icon is showing in the MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-

ton.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to select the Format item.

The display prompts you for conﬁrmation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button and the

display prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can press the [-] button at this point to can-

cel the operation.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the format operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Formatting USB Flash Memory

• If you format a USB ﬂash memory that already contains data, all of

the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data

when using the format function.

CAUTION

• Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display

the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the

power or remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If the USB ﬂash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate

message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-

cute the operation.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 95

Using USB Flash Memory

Three types of data are saved to one “User File” by this operation: user song, style ﬁle, and registration mem-

ory data. When you save a user song the style ﬁle and registration memory are also saved automatically.

Make sure that a properly formatted

USB ﬂash memory has been properly

connected to the instrument’s USB TO

DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is

showing in the MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the User File Save item.

A default ﬁle name will automatically be cre-

ated.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor

will appear below the ﬁrst character in

the ﬁle name.

Change the ﬁle name as necessary.

• The [-] button moves the cursor to the left,

and the [0] button moves it to the right.

• Use the dial to select a character for the cur-

rent cursor location.

• The [+] button deletes the character at the

cursor location.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the save operation at this point

by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the save operation

will begin.

The user song will be stored to the USER FILE

folder in the USB ﬂash memory.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Saving Data

● To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a ﬁle that already exists

on the USB ﬂash memory, use the dial or the

[+] and [-] buttons to select the ﬁle, then skip

ahead to step 6.

• Up to 100 user ﬁles can be saved to a single USB ﬂash memory.

• If the USB ﬂash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate

message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-

cute the operation.

• If there is not enough capacity left on the USB ﬂash memory to save

the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you

will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted ﬁles from the USB

ﬂash memory to make more memory available (page 98), or use a

different USB ﬂash memory.

• Refer to the “Messages” list on page 116 for other possible errors

that might prevent you from completing the operation.

NOTE

Cursor

Cursor right

Delete characterCursor left The dial selects

characters

• Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If an existing ﬁlename is speciﬁed the display prompts you for conﬁr-

mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the ﬁle, or [-]

to cancel.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will

depend on the condition of the USB ﬂash memory.

NOTE

96 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Using USB Flash Memory

This operation converts a user song (song numbers 031–035) to SMF Format 0 and saves the ﬁle to USB

ﬂash memory.

Make sure that a properly formatted

USB ﬂash memory has been properly

connected to the instrument’s USB TO

DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is

showing in the MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-

ton.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the SMF Save item.

The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will

be highlighted.

Select the source user song.

You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simulta-

neously to select the ﬁrst user song.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

The DESTINATION SONG will be high-

lighted, and a default name will appear for the

converted song ﬁle.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A cursor will appear below the ﬁrst character in

the ﬁle name.

Change the ﬁle name as necessary.

Refer to “Saving Data” on page 95 for ﬁlename

entry.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the save operation at this point

by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the save operation

will begin.

The user song will be stored to the USER FILE

folder in the USB ﬂash memory.

A message will appear on the display

to inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Convert a User Song to SMF Format and Save

● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)?

The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the

most common and widely compatible sequence

formats used for storing sequence data. There are

two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large

number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF

Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI

sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

The source user song name.

● To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a ﬁle that already exists

on the USB ﬂash memory, use the dial or the

[+] and [-] buttons to select the ﬁle, then skip

ahead to step 7.

The name of the ﬁle to

be saved

Cursor

• Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If an existing ﬁlename is speciﬁed the display prompts you for conﬁr-

mation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the ﬁle, or [-]

to cancel.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will

depend on the condition of the USB ﬂash memory.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 97

Using USB Flash Memory

User ﬁles, style ﬁles, and styles residing on a USB ﬂash memory can be loaded into the instrument. The

style ﬁle will be loaded into style number 161. If the required style ﬁle has already been transferred to the

instrument from a computer using the Musicsoft Downloader application, start from step 2, below. Refer to

“Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer” on page 102 for details on transferring style ﬁles.

With the USB ﬂash memory containing

the ﬁle you want to load connected to

the USB TO DEVICE connector, check

that the File Control icon is shown in

the MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-

ton.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the Load item.

Use the dial to select the user ﬁle or

style ﬁle you want to load.

All user ﬁles in the USB ﬂash memory will be

displayed ﬁrst, followed by the style ﬁles.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the load operation at this point

by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the load operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Loading User Files and Style Files

• If you load a User File user song (031–035), style ﬁle, and registra-

tion memory data will be overwritten by the newly loaded data. If

you only load a style ﬁle, only the style ﬁle will be overwritten.

Save important data to a USB ﬂash memory before loading data

that will overwrite it.

CAUTION

• Style ﬁles must be located in the root directory. Style ﬁles located

within folders will not be recognized.

NOTE

• Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the

operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

98 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Using USB Flash Memory

This procedure deletes user ﬁle and SMF ﬁle from a USB ﬂash memory.

Make sure that the USB ﬂash memory

containing the ﬁle(s) you want to delete

has been properly connected to the

instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal,

and that the icon is showing in the

MAIN display.

Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but-

ton.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] but-

tons to locate the Delete item.

Select the ﬁle you want to delete.

You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simulta-

neously to select the ﬁrst song or user ﬁle on

the USB ﬂash memory.

Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis-

play prompts you for conﬁrmation.

You can cancel the delete operation at this

point by pressing the [-] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] button, and the delete operation

will begin.

A message will appear on the display to

inform you that the operation has ﬁn-

ished.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display.

Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory

• Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display

the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or

remove the USB ﬂash memory during this operation.

CAUTION

• If the USB ﬂash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate

message will appear on the display and you will not be able to exe-

cute the operation.

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 99

Using USB Flash Memory

Make sure that the USB ﬂash memory

containing the song or music database

you want to play has been properly con-

nected to the instrument’s USB TO

DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is

showing in the MAIN display.

Press the [SONG] button if a song ﬁle is

to be played, or the [MUSIC DATABASE]

button if a Music Database is to be

played. Files of the corresponding type

will be displayed.

Use the dial to select the ﬁle you want

to play: Song numbers 36 and higher, or

Music Database numbers 301 and

higher.

Play the selected ﬁle in the same way

the internal ﬁles are played: press the

[START/STOP] button, or play on the

keyboard.

Playing Data on a USB Flash Memory

• In order to play data copied to a USB ﬂash memory from a com-

puter or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB

ﬂash memory’s root directory or a ﬁrst-level/second-level folder in

the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside

a second-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instru-

ment.

USB ﬂash memory (Root)

Song

File

Song

File

Song

File

Can be selected/played.

Cannot be selected/played.

Song

File

IMPORTANT

100 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Connections

q USB TO DEVICE terminal

This terminal allows connection to USB stor-

age devices. Refer to “Precautions when using

the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on

page 93.

w USB TO HOST terminal

This terminal allows direct connection to a per-

sonal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-

sonal Computer” on page 101 for more

information.

Connectors

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 101

Connections

The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer.

● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 102).

● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 104).

The connection procedure is as follows:

Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com-

puter.

The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM.

Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on

pages 109–111.

Connect the USB terminal of the computer to

the USB terminal on the instrument using an

AB type USB cable (USB cable sold sepa-

rately).

The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft

Downloader application that allows you to transfer

song ﬁles from your computer to the instrument’s

ﬂash memory. For instructions about how to install

Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song

ﬁles, see pages 104, 111.

■ Precautions when using the USB TO HOST

terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB TO

HOST terminal, make sure to observe the follow-

ing points. Failing to do so risks freezing the com-

puter and corrupting or losing the data. If the

computer or the instrument freezes, restart the

application software or the computer OS, or turn

the power to the instrument off then on again.

Connecting a Personal Computer

USB cable

Instrument

Computer

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal,

exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as sus-

pended, sleep, standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the com-

puter to the USB TO HOST terminal.

•Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument

on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO

HOST terminal.

• Quit any open application software on the computer.

• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instru-

ment. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard

or play back a song, etc.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should

wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when

turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when

alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

CAUTION

102 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Connections

By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the com-

puter, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument.

● When the instrument is connected with computer,

it transmits/receives performance data.

■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons

to select the item you want to change its

value.

Use the dial to select ON or OFF.

Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer

USB cable

USB terminalUSB terminal

Instrument

Computer

Item Range/Settings Description

Local ON/OFF

Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal

tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when

local control is off.

External Clock ON/OFF

These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to

a clock signal from an external device (ON).

Keyboard Out ON/OFF

These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or

not (OFF).

Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback.

Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback.

• If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely

may be caused by Local Control being set to off.

CAUTION

• If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from

an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will

not start.

CAUTION

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 103

Connections

■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A number of MIDI settings need to be made when

you want to transfer performance data between the

computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item

can conveniently make multiple settings for you in

one operation. Three settings are available: PC1,

PC2, and OFF.

This setting is not necessary when transferring

song or backup ﬁles between the computer and the

instrument.

* Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Note-

book.

Press and hold the [DEMO] button for

longer than a second so that the PC

Mode item appears.

Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF.

You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on

your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the

panel.

■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

To use the remote control functions, simulta-

neously hold down the lowest two keys on the key-

board (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate

key (shown below).

PC1 PC2* OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

• When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo,

song recording, and lesson features cannot be used.

NOTE

•You can also access the PC Mode item by ﬁrst pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

locate it (page 89).

NOTE

Remote Control of MIDI Devices

A-1

A#-1

C7: Fast forward

B6: Start

A6: Stop

G6: Rewind

F6: Top (move to the begin-

ning of the song)

E6: Metronome ON/OFF

• Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2

mode.

NOTE

104 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Connections

This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a

sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to ﬁrst send and record the panel setup

data before the actual performance data.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY

[] and [ ]

buttons

to select the Initial Send item.

Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO]

to cancel.

MIDI songs, styles, or Music Database ﬁles resid-

ing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM can be

transferred to the instrument. Backup ﬁle can also

be transferred from the instrument to the computer

and back.

In order to transfer ﬁles between your computer

and the instrument you will need to install the

Musicsoft Downloader application and the USB-

MIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM

on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CD-

ROM Installation Guide on page 107 for installa-

tion details.

■With the Musicsoft

Downloader You Can.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● Transfer ﬁles from the computer to the instru-

ment’s ﬂash memory.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 105.

The procedure for transferring songs included

on the Accessory CD-ROM from your com-

puter to the instrument is given as an example.

● Backup ﬁle can be transferred from the instru-

ment to a computer and back.

⇒ refer to the procedure described on

page 106.

Initial Send

Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument

● Data that can be transferred from a computer

to this instrument.

• Data Capacity: 875KB

512 ﬁles total for the Song, Style and Music

Database.

• Data Format

Song: .mid SMF format 0/1

Style: .sty

Music Database: .mfd

Backup File: 08PG88.BUP

Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with

Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 105

Connections

■Use Musicsoft Downloader

To Transfer Songs From the

Accessory CD-ROM To the

Instrument’s ﬂash memory

● ● ● ● ●

Install the Musicsoft Downloader and

USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then

connect the computer and the instru-

ment (page 109).

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

A start window will appear automatically.

Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader

shortcut icon that is created on the

desktop.

This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader

application and the main window will appear.

Click the “Add File” button and the Add

File window will appear.

Click the button to the right of “Look in”

and select the CD-ROM drive from the

drop-down menu that appears. Double-

click the “SampleData” Folder on the

window. Select the ﬁle from the “Song-

Data” Folder you want to transfer to the

instrument, and click “Open”.

At this point you can select a Style or Music Data-

base ﬁle on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer

it to the instrument in the same way as a song ﬁle.

A copy of the selected MIDI song ﬁle

will appear in the “List of ﬁles stored

temporarily” at the top of the window.

The memory medium will also be displayed at

the bottom of the window to specify the desti-

nation for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and

then “Flash memory”.

After selecting the ﬁle in the “List of

ﬁles stored temporarily”, click the

downward [Move] button and a conﬁr-

mation message will appear. Click [OK]

and the song will be transferred from

the “List of ﬁles stored temporarily” to

the instrument’s memory.

• If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding.

NOTE

• The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader

is running.

NOTE

q Click the CD-ROM drive

w Double-click “SampleData” Folder

→ “SongData” Folder, and click a

song ﬁle.

e Click “Open”

q Click “Electronic Musical Instruments”,

and then “Flash Memory”

• Files transferred to a USB ﬂash memory root directory or the instru-

ment’s ﬂash memory using the Musicsoft Downloader—any location

outside the USER FILES folder on the USB ﬂash memory device—

cannot be deleted via the instrument’s ﬁle control display. Use the

Musicsoft Downloader delete button to delete such ﬁles.

NOTE

106 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Connections

Close the window to end the Musicsoft

Downloader.

To playback a song stored in ﬂash

memory, press the [SONG] button.

Use the dial to select the song you want

to play, then press the [START/STOP]

button to start playback.

■Transfer a Backup ﬁle from

the instrument to a computer

● ● ●

You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer

“Backup ﬁle” containing backup data (page 63),

including the ﬁve User Songs stored on the instru-

ment, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musi-

cal Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader

display, and then “System Drive”, a ﬁle named

“08PG88.BUP” will appear in the lower right cor-

ner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is

the backup ﬁle. For details about how to transfer

backup ﬁles using the Musicsoft Downloader

application, refer to the Online help “Transferring

Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for

unprotected data)” in the application.

● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons...

In order to use songs (only SMF format 0)

transferred from a computer for lessons it is

necessary to specify which channels are to be

played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts.

1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song

(036–) residing in ﬂash memory for which you

want to set the guide track.

2 Press the [FUNCTION] button.

3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to

select the R-Part or L-Part item.

4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to

play back as the speciﬁed right- or left-hand

part.

We recommend that you select channel 1 for the

right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

• End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the ﬁle transferred from

your computer.

NOTE

• Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only

will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the

memory media may become unstable and its contents may dis-

appear completely when the power is turned on or off.

CAUTION

• Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or

improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a

copy of all important data stored on your computer.

CAUTION

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument.

NOTE

• The backup data, including the ﬁve User Songs’ is transmitted/

received as a single ﬁle. As a result, all backup data will be over-

written every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when

transferring data.

CAUTION

• Do not rename the backup ﬁle on the computer. If you do so it will

not be recognized when transferred to the instrument.

CAUTION

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 107

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

• The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation.

• Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon

breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of

this manual before installing the application.)

• Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden

without the written consent of the manufacturer.

•Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and can-

not be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software.

• This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.).

Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer.

• Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in speciﬁcations and functions will be

announced separately.

• The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different

from the screens which appear on your computer.

● Data Types

This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 109 for software installation instructions.

● Operating System (OS)

The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems.

SPECIAL NOTICES

Important Notices about the CD-ROM

• Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other

than a computer. The resulting high-volume noise may cause hear-

ing damage or damage to the playback device.

CAUTION

108 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer.

You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/

■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Please read the Software License Agreement on

page 137 before opening the CD-ROM package.

Check the system requirements to

make sure that the software will run on

your computer.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the

CD-ROM drive.

The start window should appear automatically.

Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com-

puter.

Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on

page 109 for installation and setup instructions.

Connect the instrument to the com-

puter.

The connection procedure is described on page

101.

Install the software.

Musicsoft Downloader:

See page 111.

Launch the software.

For further software operation refer to the online

help supplied with the software.

Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 112 when

you have trouble with installing the driver.

CD-ROM Contents

Folder Name

Application / Data

Name

Contents

MSD_ Musicsoft Downloader

This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet

and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory.

DMN_ Digital Music Notebook

Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online

service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite songs.

You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions

with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook.

DMN_FlashDemo

Digital Music Notebook

Flash Demo

Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music

Notebook.

SongBook Song Book

Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as

well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs

1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11

are provided in this manual beginning on page 118.

USBdrv2k_

USB-MIDI Driver

(Windows 2000/XP)

This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer

via USB.

USBdrvVista_

USB-MIDI Driver

(Windows Vista/XP x64)

SampleData

SongData MIDI 70 songs

These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the instrument

and played or used with the instrument functions.

StyleData 5 style ﬁles

MDB 5 music database ﬁles

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 109

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

■

Installing the USB-MIDI Driver

● ● ● ●

In order to be able to communicate with and use

MIDI devices connected to your computer, the

appropriate driver software must be properly

installed on your computer.

The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software

and similar applications on your computer to trans-

mit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI

devices via a USB cable.

• Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 110.

• Windows XP installation ➔ page 110.

• Windows Vista installation ➔ page 111.

System Requirements

Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display

Musicsoft Downloader

Windows 2000/

XP Home Edition/

XP Professional/Vista

*Only 32-bit is supported.

233 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

processor family

(500 MHz or higher is

recommended)

64 MB or more

(256 MB or more

is recommended)

at least 128 MB of

free space (at least

512 MB of free

space is

recommended)

800 x 600

HighColor

(16-bit)

USB Driver for Windows

2000/XP

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional

166 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

processor family

32 MB or more

(64 MB or more is

recommended)

at least 3 MB of free

space

—

USB Driver for Windows

Vista/XP x64

Windows Vista/XP

Professional x64 Edition

800 MHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

processor family or Intel

64 compatible processor

512 MB or more

at least 3 MB of free

space

—

Digital Music Notebook

Windows XP Home/

Professional Edition,

Service Pack 1a (SP1a)

more/Windows Vista

*Only 32-bit is supported.

400 MHz or higher

processor clock speed

(Intel

Pentium

Celeron

Processor

family, or compatible

processor recommended)

128 MB or more

(256 MB or more

is recommended)

at least 150 MB of

free space

1024 x 768

HighColor

(16-bit)

Digital Music Notebook

(Requirements for

playing content with

video included.)

Windows 2000/XP Home

Edition/XP Professional/

Vista

*Only 32-bit is supported.

1 GHz or higher; Intel

Pentium

/Celeron

Processor family (1.4 GHz

or more is recommended)

256 MB or more

Software Installation

● Uninstall (Removing the Software)

Installed software can be removed from your

computer as follows:

From the Windows Start menu select Start →

Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove

Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the

item you want to remove and click [Add or

Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to

remove the selected software.

• The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on

the OS version you are using.

NOTE

Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you

will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is

displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My

Computer” folder. The root directory of the CD-

ROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively.

Driver

USB

Cable

MIDI device

Computer

Sequence

software

110 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

Installing the driver in Windows 2000

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on to Windows 2000.

Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel]

➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Sign-

ing] ➔ [File Signature Veriﬁcation], and

check the radio button to the left of

“Ignore—Install all ﬁles, regardless of ﬁle

signature” and click [OK].

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive.

A start window will appear automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on the

MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB

cable to connect the MIDI device to the

computer. After making the connections,

turn on the power of the MIDI device.

The system automatically launches the

Found New Hardware Wizard. Click [Next].

(Some computers may take a while to dis-

play the Wizard window.)

Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-

tion of the Owner’s Manual.

Select the radio button for “Search for a

suitable driver for my device [recom-

mended]”, then click [Next].

Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box,

deselect all other check boxes, then click

[Next].

Deselect the “Install one of the other driv-

ers”, then click [Next].

When the installation is complete, the

Wizard displays “Completing the Found

New Hardware Wizard”.

Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

Restart the computer.

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

Installing the driver in Windows XP

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on to Windows XP.

Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the

control panel appears as “Pick a cate-

gory”, click “Switch to Classic View” in

the upper left of the window.

All control panels and icons will be displayed.

Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver

Signing Options] and check the radio but-

ton to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK].

Click the [OK] button to close System

Properties, and then click “X” in the upper

right of the window to close the Control

Panel.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive.

A start window will appear automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on

the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a

USB cable to connect the MIDI device to

the computer. After making the connec-

tions, turn on the power of the MIDI

device. The system launches the Found

New Hardware Wizard automatically.

Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-

tion of the Owner’s Manual. If the system dis-

plays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right

corner, wait until Wizard window is displayed.

(Some computers may take a while to display the

window.)

If the Wizard window prompts you to specify

whether or not to connect to Windows Update,

select the radio button for “No, not this time”,

then click [Next].

Select the radio button for “Install the

software automatically (recommended)”,

then click [Next].

When the installation is complete, the

Wizard displays “Completing the Found

New Hardware Wizard”.

Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

Restart the computer.

If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in

the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard win-

dow is displayed. (Some computers may take a

while to display the Wizard window.)

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

• If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during

detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g.,

D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation.

NOTE

• If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to

install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes].

NOTE

• If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Win-

dows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click

[Continue Anyway].

NOTE

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 111

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

When using Windows XP Professional

x64 Edition, the Support Module must

be installed.

After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the

connected USB devices, select “My Computer”

from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon

and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select

“USBdrvVista_” → “XPx64SupportModule” →

“Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the on-

screen directions.

Installing the driver in Windows Vista

Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on to Windows Vista.

Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive. A start window will appear

automatically.

First, make sure the POWER switch on

the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a

USB cable to connect the MIDI device to

the computer. After making the connec-

tions, turn on the power of the MIDI

device. The system automatically

launches the “Found New Hardware” win-

dow. Click “Locate and install driver soft-

ware (recommended)”.

Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the

“Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” sec-

tion of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers

may take a while to display the window.).

If a message allowing Windows to search

online for driver software appears, click

“Don’t search online.”

If a message prompting you to insert the

disk that came with your device appears,

click [Next].

The system starts the installation.

When the installation is complete, the

system displays the message “The soft-

ware for this device has been success-

fully installed.” Click [Close].

(Some computers may take a while to display the

window.)

The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete.

■Installing the Musicsoft

Downloader and Digital

Music Notebook Applications

● ● ●

Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your

computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start win-

dow will appear automatically showing

software applications.

Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital

Music Notebook].

Click the [install] button and follow the

on-screen instructions to install the soft-

ware.

For Digital Music Notebook operating instruc-

tions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music

Notebook application and click “Help”.

For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions

see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft

Downloader application and click “Help”.

*You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft

Downloader at the following Internet URL.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Pro-

fessional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer.

NOTE

• Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary,

even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USB-

MIDI driver.

NOTE

• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].

NOTE

• If the “Windows Security” window appears, conﬁrm this software is

authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install].

NOTE

•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order

to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows

2000, XP or Vista.

•You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order

to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows,

XP or Vista.

IMPORTANT

• When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Inter-

net Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer.

IMPORTANT

• Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Note-

book content. Credit card processing may not be possible for

some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make

sure that your credit card can be used.

IMPORTANT

• Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS

SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to

when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at

the end of this manual before using the application.

NOTE

• If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your

“My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and

select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and

proceed to step 2, below.

NOTE

• Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer ﬁles between

this instrument and a computer. No other ﬁle transfer application

can be used.

IMPORTANT

112 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

■Troubleshooting

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the

USB cable, then connect it again.

• Is the USB function enabled on your com-

puter?

When you connect the instrument to the

computer for the ﬁrst time, if the “Add New

Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB

function on the computer may be disabled.

Perform the following steps.

1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔

[Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Win-

dows 2000/XP, or select [Control Panel] ➔

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista).

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear

at “Universal serial bus controller” or

“USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x”

mark, the USB controller is disabled.

• Is any unknown device registered?

If driver installation fails, the instrument will be

marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will

not be able to install the driver. Delete the

“Unknown device” by following the steps below.

1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔

[Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Win-

dows 2000/XP, or select [Control Panel] ➔

[Device Manager] (for Windows Vista.)

* Classic View only in Windows XP.

2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu

“View devices by type”.

3 If you ﬁnd “Other devices”, double-click it

to extend the tree to look for “Unknown

device”. If one appears, select it and click

the [Remove] button.

4 Remove the USB cable from the instru-

ment, and make the connection again.

5 Install the driver again.

• Windows 2000 users..... see page 110

• Windows XP users........ see page 110

• Windows Vista users .... see page 111

• Did you install the driver? (page 109)

• Is the USB cable connected correctly?

•Are the volume settings of the instrument,

playback device, and application program set

to the appropriate levels?

•Have you selected an appropriate port in the

sequence software?

•Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver?

The latest driver can be downloaded from the

following web site.

http://music.yamaha.com/download/

• Does your computer satisfy the system

requirements?

• Is any other application or device driver run-

ning?

• Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI

application is running.

You may not be able to suspend/resume

normally, depending on the particular

environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even

so, simply disconnecting and connecting the

USB cable will allow you to use the instrument

functions again.

[Windows 2000/XP/Vista]

1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis-

trator” account to log on Windows.

Close all applications and windows that are

open.

2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-

ROM drive.

3 Select “My Computer” from the Start

menu.

4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select

“Open” from the pop-up menu.

Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_”

folder ➔ “uninstall” folder ➔ “uninstall.exe”

ﬁle and launch “uninstall.exe.” ﬁle.

Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall

the driver.

The driver cannot be installed.

When controlling the instrument from your

computer via USB, the instrument does not

operate correctly or no sound is heard.

Playback response is delayed.

Cannot suspend or resume the com-

puter correctly.

How can I remove the driver?

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 113

Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide

6 A message asking you to restart your

computer in order to complete the

uninstall procedure will appear.

Driver removal will be complete when you

have restarted your computer.

• When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from

“USBdrvVista_” folder.

NOTE

• If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue].

NOTE

114 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

■ For the Instrument

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced.

Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may pro-

duce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it

further away from the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is

played or when a song or style is being played

back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on

the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack,

no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 102.)

Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,

etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is

showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 84), the keys in the right

hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type.

The style or song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;

refer to “External Clock” on page 102.

The style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 90) is set to an appropriate

level.

Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are play-

ing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 79).

Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing

press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting

style number 131 or a style between 143 and 160

(Pianist).

This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143–

160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other

parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment

range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on.

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound

seems to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the

Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing

back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “sto-

len”) from the accompaniment or song.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the foot-

switch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains

the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the foot-

switch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning

on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note.

This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple

recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the key-

board; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different

from note to note.

The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or

there are Japanese characters in the display mes-

sages.

Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to

English. (See page 16)

Appendix

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 115

Troubleshooting

The appropriate display does not appear when the

[SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or

[VOICE] button is pressed.

Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return

to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons.

The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is

played.

Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on.

Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off.

The ACMP indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button ﬁrst when

you are going to use any style-related function.

There is no harmony sound.

The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their

type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are

played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is

played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether

style playback is on or off. For types 06–12 you need to play two

notes at the same time.

The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper

area of the MAIN display and the USB device

does not respond.

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of

the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the

USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

116 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Messages

LCD Message Comment

Access error!

Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the ﬂash

memory.

All Memory Clearing...

Displayed while erasing all data in the ﬂash memory. Never turn the power

off during data transmission.

Are you sure? Conﬁrms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not.

Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the ﬂash memory.

Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled.

Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs.

Com Mode

Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected

to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played

back.

Completed

Indicates the speciﬁed job completion such as data saving and transmis-

sion.

Copy File Displayed while copying a ﬁle in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application.

Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data.

Delete File Displayed while deleting a ﬁle in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Delete OK ? Conﬁrms whether the Delete job is executed or not.

Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged.

End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed.

Error! Displayed when writing has failed.

“File information area is not large enough.”

Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total

number of ﬁles have become too many.

File is not found. Indicates there is no ﬁle.

“File too large. Loading is impossible.”

Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the ﬁle data is too

large.

Flash Clearing...

Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal

ﬂash memory.

Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Conﬁrms whether formatting the media is executed or not.

Formatting... Displayed while formatting.

Load OK ? Conﬁrms whether loading is executed or not.

Loading... Displayed while loading data.

Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted.

Media capacity is full.

Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory

becomes full.

Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording.

“MIDI receive buffer overﬂow.”

Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to

proceed.

Move File Displayed while moving a ﬁle in the Musicsoft Downloader.

“Now Writing...

(Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise

the data may be damaged.)”

Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while

writing. Doing so may result in data loss.

OverCurrent

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the

overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO

DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 117

Messages

Overwrite ? Conﬁrms whether overwriting is executed or not.

Please Wait...

Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying

scores and lyrics.

Rename File Displayed while rewriting the ﬁle name in the Musicsoft Downloader.

Save OK ? Conﬁrms whether saving is executed or not.

Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.

Saving...

Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while

saving. Doing so may result in data loss.

Send OK? Conﬁrms whether the data transmission is executed or not.

Sending... Displayed while transmitting data.

“Since the media is in use now, this

function is not available.”

Indicates that the ﬁle control function is currently unavailable since the

media is being accessed.

Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconﬁrms whether each operation is executed or not.

“The limit of the media has been reached.”

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory

structure has become too complicated.

The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.

“The media is write-protected.”

Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-pro-

tected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.

“The song data is too large to be

converted to notation.”

Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too

large.

There are too many ﬁles.

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of ﬁles

exceeds the capacity.

“This function is not available now.”

Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is

executing another job.

[nnn] “ﬁle name”

Indicates the ﬁle name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the

receiving block.

LCD Message Comment

• Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages neces-

sary to be explained only.

NOTE

118 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Scores

This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece.

Hallelujah Chorus

Song No. 9 qq

=123

(Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger)

Scores

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 119

Scores

120 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the

part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.

Ave Maria

Song No. 10 qq

=61

(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)

Repeatedly Play the Same Key.

P.A.T.

Your Turn.

Type =CHORD

Scores

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 121

Scores

122 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technol-

ogy feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the

part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part.

Nocturne op.9-2

Song No. 11 qq

=108

(Function Demo for performance assistant technology)

P.A.T.

Type =CHORD/FREE

Scores

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 123

124 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Voice List

■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means

that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regard-

less of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a

number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment

is used the total number of available notes for playing on the

keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the

Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is

exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most

recent notes have priority (last note priority).

● Panel Voice List

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for

each voice. Use these program change numbers when

playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device.

• Program change numbers are often speciﬁed as numbers

“0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system,

in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the trans-

mitted program change numbers to select the appropriate

sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program

change number 1.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long

decay after the notes have been released while the sus-

tain pedal (footswitch) is held.

NOTE

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

001 000 113 001 Live! Grand Piano

002 000 114 001 Live! Warm Grand Piano

003 000 112 001 Grand Piano

004 000 112 002 Bright Piano

005 000 112 007 Harpsichord

006 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano

007 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano

008 000 113 003 CP 80

E.PIANO

009 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

010 000 118 005 Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano

011 000 119 005 Cool! Electric Piano

012 000 113 006 Hyper Tines

013 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano

014 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano

015 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano

016 000 114 008 E.Clavichord

017 000 112 008 Clavi

ORGAN

018 000 118 019 Cool! Organ

019 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ

020 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1

021 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2

022 000 112 019 Rock Organ

023 000 114 019 Purple Organ

024 000 112 018 Click Organ

025 000 116 017 Bright Organ

026 000 127 019 Theater Organ

027 000 121 020 16’+2’ Organ

028 000 120 020 16’+4’ Organ

029 000 113 020 Chapel Organ

030 000 112 020 Church Organ

031 000 112 021 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

032 000 112 022 Musette Accordion

033 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion

034 000 113 024 Bandoneon

035 000 113 023 Modern Harp

036 000 112 023 Harmonica

GUITAR

037 000 112 025 Classical Guitar

038 000 112 026 Folk Guitar

039 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar

040 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar

041 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar

042 000 112 028 Clean Guitar

043 000 113 027 Octave Guitar

044 000 112 029 Muted Guitar

045 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar

046 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar

BASS

047 000 112 034 Finger Bass

048 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass

049 000 112 035 Pick Bass

050 000 112 036 Fretless Bass

051 000 112 037 Slap Bass

052 000 112 039 Synth Bass

053 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass

054 000 113 040 Dance Bass

STRINGS

055 000 116 050 Live! Orchestra

056 000 112 049 String Ensemble

057 000 112 050 Chamber Strings

058 000 113 050 Slow Strings

059 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings

060 000 112 051 Synth Strings

061 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings

062 000 112 041 Violin

063 000 112 043 Cello

064 000 112 044 Contrabass

065 000 112 047 Harp

066 000 112 106 Banjo

067 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

068 000 112 053 Choir

069 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble

070 000 112 055 Air Choir

071 000 112 054 Vox Humana

SAXOPHONE

072 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax

073 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax

074 000 114 072 Sweet! Clarinet

075 000 118 067 Growl Sax

076 000 112 067 Tenor Sax

077 000 112 066 Alto Sax

078 000 112 065 Soprano Sax

079 000 112 068 Baritone Sax

080 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax

081 000 112 072 Clarinet

082 000 112 069 Oboe

083 000 112 070 English Horn

084 000 112 071 Bassoon

TRUMPET

085 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet

086 000 117 058 Sweet! Trombone

087 000 114 060 Sweet! Muted Trumpet

088 000 112 057 Trumpet

089 000 112 058 Trombone

090 000 113 058 Trombone Section

091 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet

092 000 112 061 French Horn

093 000 112 059 Tuba

BRASS

094 000 112 062 Brass Section

095 000 113 062 Big Band Brass

096 000 113 063 80’s Brass

097 000 119 062 Mellow Horns

098 000 114 063 Techno Brass

099 000 112 063 Synth Brass

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 125

● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List

FLUTE

100 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute

101 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute

102 000 112 074 Flute

103 000 112 073 Piccolo

104 000 112 076 Pan Flute

105 000 112 075 Recorder

106 000 112 080 Ocarina

SYNTH LEAD

107 000 112 081 Square Lead

108 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead

109 000 115 082 Analogon

110 000 119 082 Fargo

111 000 112 099 Star Dust

112 000 112 086 Voice Lead

113 000 112 101 Brightness

SYNTH PAD

114 000 118 089 SweetHeaven

115 000 112 092 Xenon Pad

116 000 112 095 Equinox

117 000 112 089 Fantasia

118 000 113 090 Dark Moon

119 000 113 101 Bell Pad

PERCUSSION

120 000 112 012 Vibraphone

121 000 112 013 Marimba

122 000 112 014 Xylophone

123 000 112 115 Steel Drums

124 000 112 009 Celesta

125 000 112 011 Music Box

126 000 112 015 Tubular Bells

127 000 112 048 Timpani

DRUM KITS

128 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1

129 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2

130 127 000 009 Room Kit

131 127 000 017 Rock Kit

132 127 000 025 Electronic Kit

133 127 000 026 Analog Kit

134 127 000 113 Dance Kit

135 127 000 033 Jazz Kit

136 127 000 041 Brush Kit

137 127 000 049 Symphony Kit

138 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1

139 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

XG PIANO

140 000 000 001 Grand Piano

141 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP

142 000 040 001 Piano Strings

143 000 041 001 Dream

144 000 000 002 Bright Piano

145 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP

146 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano

147 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP

148 000 032 003 Detuned CP80

149 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano

150 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

151 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1

152 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP

153 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1

154 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2

155 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP

*156 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2

157 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano

158 000 000 007 Harpsichord

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

159 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP

160 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2

161 000 000 008 Clavi

162 000 001 008 Clavi KSP

XG CHROMATIC

163 000 000 009 Celesta

164 000 000 010 Glockenspiel

165 000 000 011 Music Box

166 000 064 011 Orgel

167 000 000 012 Vibraphone

168 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP

169 000 000 013 Marimba

170 000 001 013 Marimba KSP

171 000 064 013 Sine Marimba

172 000 097 013 Balimba

173 000 098 013 Log Drums

174 000 000 014 Xylophone

175 000 000 015 Tubular Bells

176 000 096 015 Church Bells

177 000 097 015 Carillon

178 000 000 016 Dulcimer

179 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2

180 000 096 016 Cimbalom

181 000 097 016 Santur

XG ORGAN

182 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ

183 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ

184 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1

185 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2

186 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1

187 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3

188 000 040 017 16+2’2/3

189 000 064 017 Organ Bass

190 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2

191 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ

192 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2

193 000 000 018 Percussive Organ

194 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ

195 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ

196 000 033 018 Light Organ

197 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2

198 000 000 019 Rock Organ

199 000 064 019 Rotary Organ

200 000 065 019 Slow Rotary

201 000 066 019 Fast Rotary

202 000 000 020 Church Organ

203 000 032 020 Church Organ 3

204 000 035 020 Church Organ 2

205 000 040 020 Notre Dame

206 000 064 020 Organ Flute

207 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute

208 000 000 021 Reed Organ

209 000 040 021 Puff Organ

210 000 000 022 Accordion

211 000 000 023 Harmonica

212 000 032 023 Harmonica 2

213 000 000 024 Tango Accordion

214 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2

XG GUITAR

215 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar

216 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

217 000 096 025 Ukulele

218 000 000 026 Steel Guitar

219 000 035 026 12-string Guitar

220 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar

221 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

222 000 096 026 Mandolin

223 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar

224 000 032 027 Jazz Amp

225 000 000 028 Clean Guitar

226 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar

227 000 000 029 Muted Guitar

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

126 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

228 000 040 029 Funk Guitar

229 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar

230 000 045 029 Jazz Man

231 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar

232 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch

233 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar

234 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar

235 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2

236 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics

237 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback

238 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2

XG BASS

239 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass

240 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm

241 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

242 000 000 034 Finger Bass

243 000 018 034 Finger Dark

244 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

245 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass

246 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2

247 000 065 034 Modulated Bass

248 000 000 035 Pick Bass

249 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass

250 000 000 036 Fretless Bass

251 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2

252 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3

253 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4

254 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1

255 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass

256 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2

257 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap

258 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1

259 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass

260 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2

261 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass

262 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass

263 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass

264 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark

*265 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass

266 000 041 040 DX Bass

XG STRINGS

267 000 000 041 Violin

268 000 008 041 Slow Violin

269 000 000 042 Viola

270 000 000 043 Cello

271 000 000 044 Contrabass

272 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings

273 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings

274 000 040 045 Suspense Strings

275 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings

276 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp

277 000 040 047 Yang Chin

278 000 000 048 Timpani

XG ENSEMBLE

279 000 000 049 Strings 1

280 000 003 049 Stereo Strings

281 000 008 049 Slow Strings

282 000 035 049 60’s Strings

283 000 040 049 Orchestra

284 000 041 049 Orchestra 2

285 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra

286 000 045 049 Velocity Strings

287 000 000 050 Strings 2

288 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings

289 000 008 050 Legato Strings

290 000 040 050 Warm Strings

291 000 041 050 Kingdom

292 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1

293 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2

294 000 000 053 Choir Aahs

295 000 003 053 Stereo Choir

296 000 032 053 Mellow Choir

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

297 000 040 053 Choir Strings

298 000 000 054 Voice Oohs

299 000 000 055 Synth Voice

300 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2

301 000 041 055 Choral

302 000 064 055 Analog Voice

303 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit

304 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2

305 000 064 056 Impact

XG BRASS

306 000 000 057 Trumpet

307 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet

308 000 000 058 Trombone

309 000 018 058 Trombone 2

310 000 000 059 Tuba

311 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet

312 000 000 061 French Horn

313 000 006 061 French Horn Solo

314 000 032 061 French Horn 2

315 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra

316 000 000 062 Brass Section

317 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section

318 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1

319 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass

320 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2

321 000 018 064 Soft Brass

322 000 041 064 Choir Brass

XG REED

323 000 000 065 Soprano Sax

324 000 000 066 Alto Sax

325 000 040 066 Sax Section

326 000 000 067 Tenor Sax

327 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax

328 000 000 068 Baritone Sax

329 000 000 069 Oboe

330 000 000 070 English Horn

331 000 000 071 Bassoon

332 000 000 072 Clarinet

XG PIPE

333 000 000 073 Piccolo

334 000 000 074 Flute

335 000 000 075 Recorder

336 000 000 076 Pan Flute

337 000 000 077 Blown Bottle

338 000 000 078 Shakuhachi

339 000 000 079 Whistle

340 000 000 080 Ocarina

XG SYNTH LEAD

341 000 000 081 Square Lead

342 000 006 081 Square Lead 2

343 000 008 081 LM Square

344 000 018 081 Hollow

345 000 019 081 Shroud

346 000 064 081 Mellow

347 000 065 081 Solo Sine

348 000 066 081 Sine Lead

349 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead

350 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2

351 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth

352 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth

353 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth

354 000 020 082 Big Lead

355 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog

356 000 000 083 Calliope Lead

357 000 065 083 Pure Lead

358 000 000 084 Chiff Lead

359 000 000 085 Charang Lead

360 000 064 085 Distorted Lead

361 000 000 086 Voice Lead

362 000 000 087 Fifths Lead

363 000 035 087 Big Five

364 000 000 088 Bass & Lead

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 127

The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice.

365 000 016 088 Big & Low

366 000 064 088 Fat & Perky

367 000 065 088 Soft Whirl

XG SYNTH PAD

368 000 000 089 New Age Pad

369 000 064 089 Fantasy

370 000 000 090 Warm Pad

371 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad

372 000 000 092 Choir Pad

373 000 066 092 Itopia

374 000 000 093 Bowed Pad

375 000 000 094 Metallic Pad

376 000 000 095 Halo Pad

377 000 000 096 Sweep Pad

XG SYNTH EFFECTS

378 000 000 097 Rain

379 000 065 097 African Wind

380 000 066 097 Carib

381 000 000 098 Sound Track

382 000 027 098 Prologue

383 000 000 099 Crystal

384 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp

385 000 014 099 Popcorn

386 000 018 099 Tiny Bells

387 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel

388 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes

389 000 041 099 Clear Bells

390 000 042 099 Chorus Bells

391 000 065 099 Soft Crystal

392 000 070 099 Air Bells

393 000 071 099 Bell Harp

394 000 072 099 Gamelimba

395 000 000 100 Atmosphere

396 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere

397 000 019 100 Hollow Release

398 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano

399 000 064 100 Nylon Harp

400 000 065 100 Harp Vox

401 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad

402 000 000 101 Brightness

403 000 000 102 Goblins

404 000 064 102 Goblins Synth

405 000 065 102 Creeper

406 000 067 102 Ritual

407 000 068 102 To Heaven

408 000 070 102 Night

409 000 071 102 Glisten

410 000 096 102 Bell Choir

411 000 000 103 Echoes

412 000 000 104 Sci-Fi

XG WORLD

413 000 000 105 Sitar

414 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar

415 000 035 105 Sitar 2

416 000 097 105 Tamboura

417 000 000 106 Banjo

418 000 028 106 Muted Banjo

419 000 096 106 Rabab

420 000 097 106 Gopichant

421 000 098 106 Oud

422 000 000 107 Shamisen

423 000 000 108 Koto

424 000 096 108 Taisho-kin

425 000 097 108 Kanoon

426 000 000 109 Kalimba

427 000 000 110 Bagpipe

428 000 000 111 Fiddle

429 000 000 112 Shanai

XG PERCUSSIVE

430 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell

431 000 096 113 Bonang

432 000 097 113 Altair

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

433 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs

434 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

435 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal

436 000 000 114 Agogo

437 000 000 115 Steel Drums

438 000 097 115 Glass Percussion

439 000 098 115 Thai Bells

440 000 000 116 Woodblock

441 000 096 116 Castanets

442 000 000 117 Taiko Drum

443 000 096 117 Gran Cassa

444 000 000 118 Melodic Tom

445 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2

446 000 065 118 Real Tom

447 000 066 118 Rock Tom

448 000 000 119 Synth Drum

449 000 064 119 Analog Tom

450 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion

451 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal

XG SOUND EFFECTS

452 000 000 121 Fret Noise

453 000 000 122 Breath Noise

454 000 000 123 Seashore

455 000 000 124 Bird Tweet

456 000 000 125 Telephone Ring

457 000 000 126 Helicopter

458 000 000 127 Applause

459 000 000 128 Gunshot

460 064 000 001 Cutting Noise

461 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2

462 064 000 004 String Slap

463 064 000 017 Flute Key Click

464 064 000 033 Shower

465 064 000 034 Thunder

466 064 000 035 Wind

467 064 000 036 Stream

468 064 000 037 Bubble

469 064 000 038 Feed

470 064 000 049 Dog

471 064 000 050 Horse

472 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2

473 064 000 056 Maou

474 064 000 065 Phone Call

475 064 000 066 Door Squeak

476 064 000 067 Door Slam

477 064 000 068 Scratch Cut

478 064 000 069 Scratch Split

479 064 000 070 Wind Chime

480 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2

481 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition

482 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal

483 064 000 083 Car Passing

484 064 000 084 Car Crash

485 064 000 085 Siren

486 064 000 086 Train

487 064 000 087 Jet Plane

488 064 000 088 Starship

489 064 000 089 Burst

490 064 000 090 Roller Coaster

491 064 000 091 Submarine

492 064 000 097 Laugh

493 064 000 098 Scream

494 064 000 099 Punch

495 064 000 100 Heartbeat

496 064 000 101 Footsteps

497 064 000 113 Machine Gun

498 064 000 114 Laser Gun

499 064 000 115 Explosion

500 064 000 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

128 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Drum Kit List

Voice No. 128 129 130 131 132 133

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll Snare Roll 2

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy

Snare Snappy Electro

Snare Noisy 4

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot

Open Rim Shot H Short

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Tight Short Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Rim Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed Analog

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

•“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in

“128: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

•Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

•Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to

be played alternately with each other.)

C#1

D#1

G#1

A#1

F#1

C#0

D#0

G#0

A#0

F#0

C#2

D#2

G#2

A#2

F#2

C#3

D#3

G#3

A#3

F#3

C#4

D#4

G#4

A#4

F#4

C#5

D#5

G#5

A#5

F#5

C#6

D#6

F#6

Drum Kit List

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 129

Voice No. 128 134 135 136 137 138 139

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/001 126/000/002

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

assign

Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch H

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch L

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0 Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Techno Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2

44 G# 132G# 0 Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Techno Q Kick Soft 2

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Rim Gate

47 B 1 35 B 0 Kick Tight Kick Techno L Gran Cassa

48 C 2 36 C 1 Kick Kick Techno Kick Jazz Kick Small Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call

49 C# 237C# 1 Side Stick Side Stick Analog Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare Snare Clap Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare Tight Snare Dry Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Wind Chime

54 F# 242F# 11Hi-Hat Closed

Hi-Hat Closed Analog3

Telephone Ring 2

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2

56 G# 244G# 11Hi-Hat Pedal

Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open

Hi-Hat Open Analog 2

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Hand Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

Hand Cymbal Short

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup Car Tires Squeal

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine Car Passing

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal Car Crash

68 G# 356G# 2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog

Siren

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

Hand Cymbal 2 Train

70 A# 358A# 2 Vibraslap Jet Plane

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

Hand Cymbal 2 Short

Starship

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H Burst

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

Roller Coaster

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H

Submarine

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L Conga Analog L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3 Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L Shower Laugh

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa Thunder Scream

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Maracas 2 Wind Punch

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

Stream Heartbeat

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

Bubble Footsteps

85 C# 573C# 4 Guiro Short Feed

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4 Claves Claves 2

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open Scratch L 3

92 G# 580G# 42Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4 Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bells

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun

97 C# 685C# 5 Horse Laser Gun

98 D 6 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

99 D# 687D# 5 Firework

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5 Maou

C#1

D#1

G#1

A#1

F#1

C#0

D#0

G#0

A#0

F#0

C#2

D#2

G#2

A#2

F#2

C#3

D#3

G#3

A#3

F#3

C#4

D#4

G#4

A#4

F#4

C#5

D#5

G#5

A#5

F#5

C#6

D#6

F#6

130 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Style List

Style No. Style Name

8BEAT

1 ChartPianoPop

2 BritPopRock

3 8BeatModern

4 Cool8Beat

5 Classic8Beat

6 60’sGuitarPop

7 8BeatAdria

8 60’s8Beat

9 BubblegumPop

10 BritPopSwing

11 OffBeat

12 60’sRock

13 HardRock

14 RockShuffle

15 8BeatRock

16BEAT

16 16Beat

17 PianoPopShufle

18 PopShuffle1

19 PopShuffle2

20 GuitarPop

21 16BeatUptempo

22 KoolShuffle

23 JazzRock

24 HipHopLight

BALLAD

25 ChartPianoBld

26 PopGtrBallad

27 80’sBallad

28 PianoBallad

29 LoveSong

30 6/8ModernEP

31 6/8SlowRock

32 6/8OrchBallad

33 OrganBallad

34 PopBallad

35 16BeatBallad1

36 16BeatBallad2

DANCE

37 ClubBeat

38 Electronica

39 FunkyHouse

40 MellowHipHop

41 EuroTrance

42 Ibiza

43 DreamDance

44 TechnoPolis

45 Clubdance

46 ClubLatin

47 Garage

48 UKPop

49 HipHopGroove

50 HipShuffle

51 HipHopPop

DISCO

52 70’sDisco1

53 70’sDisco2

54 LatinDisco

55 DiscoPhilly

56 SaturdayNight

57 DiscoChocolate

58 DiscoHands

SWING&JAZZ

59 TradJazzPiano1

60 TradJazzPiano2

61 PianoBarBlues

62 BigBandFast

63 BigBandMedium

64 BigBandBallad

65 BigBandShuffle

66 JazzClub

67 Swing1

68 Swing2

69 OrchestraSwing

70 Five/Four

71 JazzBallad

72 Dixieland

73 Ragtime

74 AfroCuban

75 Charleston

R&B

76 Soul

77 DetroitPop1

78 60’sRock&Roll

79 6/8Soul

80 CrocoTwist

81 Rock&Roll

82 DetroitPop2

83 BoogieWoogie

84 ComboBoogie

85 6/8Blues

COUNTRY

86 70’sCountry

87 Country8Beat

88 CountryPop

89 CountrySwing

90 CountryBallad

91 Country2/4

92 CowboyBoogie

93 CountryShuffle

94 Bluegrass

LATIN

95 BrazilianSamba

96 BossaNova

97 PopBossa

98 Tijuana

99 DiscoLatin

100 Mambo

101 Salsa

102 Beguine

103 GuitarRumba

104 RumbaFlamenco

105 RumbaIsland

106 Reggae

BALLROOM

107 VienneseWaltz

108 EnglishWaltz

109 Slowfox

110 Foxtrot

111 Quickstep

112 Tango

113 Pasodoble

114 Samba

115 ChaChaCha

116 Rumba

Style No. Style Name

117 Jive

TRADITIONAL

118 USMarch

119 6/8March

120 GermanMarch

121 PolkaPop

122 OberPolka

123 Tarantella

124 Showtune

125 ChristmasSwing

126 ChristmasWaltz

127 ScottishReel

128 Hawaiian

WALTZ

129 ItalianWaltz

130 MariachiWaltz

131 GuitarSerenade

132 SwingWaltz

133 JazzWaltz1

134 JazzWaltz2

135 CountryWaltz

136 OberWaltzer

137 Musette

CHILDREN

138 Learning2/4

139 Learning4/4

140 Learning6/8

141 Fun 3/4

142 Fun 4/4

PIANIST

143 Stride

144 PianoBlues1

145 PianoBlues2

146 PianoRag

147 PianoRock&Roll

148 PianoBoogie

149 PianoJazzWaltz

150 PianoJazzBld

151 Arpeggio

152 Musical

153 Habanera

154 SlowRock

155 8BtPianoBallad

156 PianoMarch

157 6/8PianoMarch

158 PianoWaltz

159 PianoBeguine

160 PianoSwing

Style No. Style Name

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 131

Music Database List

MDB No. MDB Name

ALL TIME HITS

1 Jude Hey

2 New UK

3 MyLoving

4 All OK

5 Buttercp

6 JustCall

7 CheepChp

8 Daddy's

9 Dance?

10 GetBack

11 GtrWheel

12 HighTide

13 IWasBorn

14 Sailing

15 BluJeans

16 Holiday

17 Imagine

18 LoveMe

19 LetItBld

20 LdyMdona

21 YelowSub

22 Marriage

23 MovinOut

24 My Shell

25 NowNever

26 DoLoveMe

27 TcktRide

28 SeeClear

29 Masachus

30 Hard Day

31 USA Pie

32 Norway

33 YesterBd

MODERN POP

34 Watches

35 SoundMPH

36 Hold Us

37 Unfound

38 NeedSome

39 PrtTmLvr

40 MoonShdw

41 NikitSng

42 Sure of

43 Off Day

44 Tell Her

45 GirlsMne

46 NeedLove

POP CLASSICS

47 Standing

48 RainLaff

49 Sunshine

50 ForNamdo

51 ThankFor

52 ManPiano

53 CoinLane

54 LovesYou

55 Tmbourin

56 Alone

57 GldField

58 Raindrop

59 SultanSw

60 Life'sWk

61 TopWorld

62 WatchGrl

POP BALLAD

63 WnderLnd

64 CanIStop

65 EvryTime

66 IvoryAnd

67 TheWorld

68 LovWoman

69 Dolannes

70 Madigan

71 Paradise

72 Whisper

BALLAD

73 AllOdds

74 AtonalFl

75 Hero

76 Woman

77 RunToYou

78 LoveOfAl

79 CndleWnd

80 Cavatina

81 Cherish

82 ToLoveMe

83 YouKnow

84 Evrythng

85 EyesOfBl

86 Hello

87 BeThere

88 FlyAway

89 LoveYou

90 NeverLet

91 JustOnce

92 IfYouGo

93 SavingAl

94 InTheDrk

95 LovePwr

96 Vision

97 Beautifl

98 AllAlone

99 Opposite

100 BeHonest

101 SayYou

102 SayNthng

103 Stranger

104 OneDay

105 TheBayou

106 ThisSong

107 Distance

108 ThisWay

109 LoveGone

110 Inspirng

111 TrueColr

ROCK & ROLL

112 ShakenUp

113 Beethovn

114 HurryLov

115 BeCruel

116 Jumping

117 Countdwn

118 SuePeggy

119 Champion

120 Jailhous

121 BlueShoe

122 Rockin24

MDB No. MDB Name

123 Shouting

124 Rock&Rll

125 HonkyTnk

OLDIES

126 Daydream

127 Sumertme

128 Diana's

129 Uptown

130 Apache

131 IGotIt

132 Tonight

133 MyPillow

134 NoRain

135 FInalDance

136 SlpnLion

137 Ghetto

138 LipsLcky

139 PrettyWm

140 TikiGtr

141 TurnThre

142 Sherry

DANCE & DISCO

143 Babylon

144 Goodbye

145 Catch22

146 DISCO

147 Survival

148 TheNavy

149 DontHide

150 Celebrat

151 LondonRU

152 10,2 Sun

153 ShakeYou

154 Believe

155 BoySumer

156 I'mSexy

157 StuffHot

SWING & JAZZ

158 Patrol

159 Charles

160 GiveLove

161 Rhythm

162 LOVE

163 LeroyBad

164 Caraban

165 Misbehav

166 Safari

167 Smiling

168 SoWhatIs

169 TimeGone

170 TasteHny

171 Sandman

172 Tunisian

173 TwoFoot

174 MyBaby

R&B

175 AsPlayed

176 BabyGrov

177 Highwy66

178 SweetCHI

179 JustU&Me

180 ManLoves

181 OurLove

182 Wish I

MDB No. MDB Name

COUNTRY

183 OnTheRd

184 Breathe

185 InMyMind

186 ContryHw

187 GreenGrs

188 EverNeed

189 Lonesone

190 Lucille

191 HomeRng

192 Tennesse

LATIN

193 Bananabt

194 DanceMng

195 DntWorry

196 Jamaica

197 FleaSpa

198 I'mPola

199 MamboJm

200 OneNote

201 PasoCani

202 SayNoMor

203 Beguine

204 Tijuana

205 Picture

ENTERTAINMENT

206 OnTheHil

207 Barnacle

208 Califrag

209 DadClock

210 DanceLd

211 DnceFire

212 BigCntry

213 Cabaret

214 OdeToJoy

215 Mi-Re-Do

216 MyPrince

217 Necesary

218 NoBuiz

219 NoisyOld

220 Sleigh

221 RockBasy

222 Magnifiq

223 Magnfcnt

224 SilentNt

225 Nabucco

226 Standing

227 SummerPl

228 Christms

229 Favorite

230 Tubbie

231 Turkish

232 12OClock

WALTZ & TRADITIONAL

233 Blk&Whte

234 CanCan

235 Charmain

236 Musicbox

237 Clementn

238 Doodah!

239 Dreamer

240 EnterRag

241 Birthday

242 MaryLamb

MDB No. MDB Name

243 Donald's

244 MoonWlz

245 MoulinHt

246 Sunshine

247 PieceOf

248 GreenSlv

249 TakeFour

250 TexRose

251 ThePolka

252 Scarboro

253 Edelweis

254 AroundWd

255 Whatever

256 Yankee's

WORLD

257 Hawaii

258 D'amor

259 ElCondor

260 GoodbyRm

261 ILandOn

262 ItalyBel

263 Cucarumb

264 Puntuali

265 Cielito

266 ItalySun

267 SantaLuc

268 Trumpetr

269 VanMass

PIANIST

270 ItalySun

271 BeGood

272 Chaie's

273 Flower

274 Frenetic

275 Highwy66

276 Leaves

277 Miload

278 Cabaret

279 Wonderfl

280 Submarin

281 Mi-Re-Do

282 MoreRhum

283 NoBuiz

284 BeatifulSn

285 OhBlah

286 Charades

287 Sally's

288 Nabucco

289 Spanish

290 SunnyStr

291 MistyFln

292 LdnBridg

293 GrndClck

294 Importnc

295 Snowman

296 Favorite

297 SugerSpn

298 Washngtn

299 ThisWay

300 ZipperD

MDB No. MDB Name

132 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM

The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data.

File Name Song Name Composer

001Nutcr.mid

Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” P.I. Tchaikovsky

002Orphe.mid

“Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture J. Offenbach

003Slavo.mid

Slavonic Dances op.72-2 A. Dvorák

004Prima.mid

La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) A. Vivaldi

005Medit.mid

Méditation (Thaïs) J. Massenet

006Guill.mid

Guillaume Tell G. Rossini

007Fruhl.mid

Frühlingslied F. Mendelssohn

008Ungar.mid

Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 J. Brahms

009Fruhl.mid

Frühlingsstimmen J. Strauss II

010Dolly.mid

Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening T.Oesten

011Cande.mid

La Candeur J.F.Burgmüller

012Arabe.mid

Arabesque J.F.Burgmüller

013Pasto.mid

Pastorale J.F.Burgmüller

014Petit.mid

Petite Réunion J.F.Burgmüller

015Innoc.mid

Innocence J.F.Burgmüller

016Progr.mid

Progrès J.F.Burgmüller

017Taren.mid

Tarentelle J.F.Burgmüller

018Cheva.mid

La Chevaleresque J.F.Burgmüller

019Etude.mid

Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” F.Chopin

020Marci.mid

Marcia alla Turca L.v. Beethoven

021Turki.mid

Turkish March W.A. Mozart

022Valse.mid

Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” F.Chopin

023Menue.mid

Menuett L. Boccherini

024Momen.mid

Moments Musicaux op.94-3 F. Schubert

025Enter.mid

The Entertainer S. Joplin

026Prelu.mid

Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) J.S. Bach

027Violl.mid

La Viollette L.Streabbog

028Angel.mid

Angels Serenade Traditional

029Saraf.mid

Krasnyj Sarafan Traditional

030Ameri.mid

America the Beautiful S.A. Ward

031Brown.mid

Little Brown Jug Traditional

032Lomon.mid

Loch Lomond Traditional

033Bonni.mid

My Bonnie Traditional

034Londo.mid

Londonderry Air Traditional

035Banjo.mid

Ring de Banjo S.C. Foster

036Vogle.mid

Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Traditional

037Lorel.mid

Die Lorelei F. Silcher

038Funic.mid

Funiculi Funicula L. Denza

039Turke.mid

Turkey in the Straw Traditional

040Campt.mid

Camptown Races S.C. Foster

041Jingl.mid

Jingle Bells J.S. Pierpont

042Muss.mid

Muss i denn F. Silcher

043Liebe.mid

Liebesträume Nr.3 F. Liszt

044Jesu.mid

Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring J.S. Bach

045Joy.mid

Ode to Joy L.v. Beethoven

046Pearl.mid

Pearl Fisher G. Bizet

047Gavot.mid

Gavotte F.J. Gossec

048Seren.mid

Serenade/Haydn F.J. Haydn

049Menue.mid

Menuett BWV. Anh.114 J.S. Bach

050Canon.mid

Canon in D J. Pachelbel

051Vogel.mid

Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte” W.A. Mozart

052Piano.mid

Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” L.v. Beethoven

053Surpr.mid

The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 F.J. Haydn

054WildR.mid

To a Wild Rose E.A. MacDowell

055Chans.mid

Chanson du Toreador G. Bizet

056Babbi.mid

O Mio Babbino Caro G. Puccini

057RowRo.mid

Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) Traditional

058Smoky.mid

On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) Traditional

059WeWis.mid

We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Traditional

060ImMai.mid

Im Mai (DUET) Traditional

061Chris.mid

O Christmas Tree (DUET) Traditional

062MaryH.mid

Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Traditional

063TenLi.mid

Ten Little Indians (DUET) S. Winner

064PopGo.mid

Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Traditional

065Twink.mid

Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Traditional

066Close.mid

Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) J.J. Rousseau

067Cucko.mid

The Cuckoo (DUET) Traditional

068Augus.mid

O du lieber Augustin (DUET) Traditional

069Londo.mid

London Bridge (DUET) Traditional

070Three.mid

Three Blind Mice (DUET) Traditional

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 133

Effect Type List

● Harmony Types

● Reverb Types

● Chorus Types

No. Harmony Type Description

01 Duet

Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the sin-

gle-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing

songs that contain chord data.

02 Trio

03 Block

04 Country

05 Octave

06 Trill 1/4 note

Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in

time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompani-

ment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo set-

ting (page 32). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect

precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets,

1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets.

• The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two

notes are held.

• The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four).

• The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played.

07 Trill 1/6 note

08 Trill 1/8 note

09 Trill 1/12 note

10 Trill 1/16 note

11 Trill 1/24 note

12 Trill 1/32 note

13 Tremolo 1/4 note

14 Tremolo 1/6 note

15 Tremolo 1/8 note

16 Tremolo 1/12 note

17 Tremolo 1/16 note

18 Tremolo 1/24 note

19 Tremolo 1/32 note

20 Echo 1/4 note

21 Echo 1/6 note

22 Echo 1/8 note

23 Echo 1/12 note

24 Echo 1/16 note

25 Echo 1/24 note

26 Echo 1/32 note

No. Reverb Type Description

01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.

04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.

06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.

08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.

10 Off No effect.

No. Chorus Type Description

01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

05 Off No effect.

134 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [ Portable Grand ] Date:10-OCT-2007

Model DGX-530/YPG-535 MIDI Implementation Chart Version:1.0

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function...

Basic Default 1 - 16 1 - 16

Channel Changed x x

Default 3 3

Mode Messages x x

Altered ************** x

Note 0 - 127 0 - 127

Number : True voice ************** 0 - 127

Velocity Note ON o 9nH,v=1-127 o 9nH,v=1-127

Note OFF x 9nH,v=0 x

After Key’s x x

Touch Ch’s x x

Pitch Bend o 0-24 semi o 0-24 semi

0,32 o o Bank Select

1,11,84 x *1 o

6,38 o o Data Entry

7,10 o o

Control 64 o o Sustain

71 x *1 o Harmonic Content

Change 72 o o Release Time

73 x *1 o Attack Time

74 x *1 o Brightness

91,93 o o Effect Depth

96-97 x *1 o RPN Inc,Dec

100-101 o o RPN LSB,MSB

MIDI Implementation Chart

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 135

Prog o 0 - 127 o 0 - 127

Change : True # **************

System Exclusive o o

: Song Pos. x x

Common : Song Sel. x x

: Tune x x

System : Clock o o

Real Time: Commands o o

Aux :All Sound OFF x o(120,126,127)

:Reset All Cntrls x o(121)

:Local ON/OFF x o(122)

:All Notes OFF x o(123-125)

Mes- :Active Sense o o

sages:Reset x x

*1 Refer to #2 on page 136.

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO o : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO x : No

136 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

MIDI Data Format

NOTE:

1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions

as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming

data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. How-

ever, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel

voices, auto accompaniment, and songs.

• MIDI Master Tuning

• System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type

and Chorus Type.

2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be trans-

mitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be trans-

mitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the

Harmony effect.

3 Exclusive

<GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H

• This message automatically restores all default settings for

the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning.

<MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H

• This message allows the volume of all channels to be

changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive).

• The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values

for “ll” are ignored.)

<MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H,

mm, ll, cc, F7H

• This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of

all channels.

• The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning.

• The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respec-

tively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”.

<Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH,

llH, F7H

• mm : Reverb Type MSB

• ll : Reverb Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 136) for details.

<Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH,

llH, F7H

• mm : Chorus Type MSB

• ll : Chorus Type LSB

Refer to the Effect Map (page 136) for details.

4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is trans-

mitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is

transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH

(accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are rec-

ognized.

5 Local ON/OFF

<Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F

<Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00

Value for “n” is ignored.

■ Effect map

* When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest

to the speciﬁed value) is automatically set.

* The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display.

● REVERB

● CHORUS

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000 No Effect

001 (01)Hall1 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3

002 Room (04)Room1 (05)Room2

003 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2

004 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2

005...127 No Effect

TYPE

MSB

TYPE LSB

00 01 02 08 16 17 18 19 20

000...063 No Effect

064 Thru

065 Chorus (02)Chorus2

066 Celeste (01)Chorus1

067 Flanger (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2

068...127 No Effect

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 137

ATTENTION

SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREE-

MENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE

ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE

TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT

IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND

YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”).

BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING

TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT

AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE

USE THIS SOFTWARE.

1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT

Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s)

and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFT-

WARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data.

The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is pro-

tected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While

you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFT-

WARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copy-

rights.

• You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer.

• You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for

backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup

copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copy-

right notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy

of the SOFTWARE.

• You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFT-

WARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads

and agrees to the terms of this Agreement.

2. RESTRICTIONS

• You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or

otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method

whatsoever.

• You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFT-

WARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE.

• You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to

another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers.

• You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that vio-

lates public policy.

• You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without

permission by Yamaha Corporation.

Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained

by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which

you must observe.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any com-

mercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner.

• Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, trans-

ferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public

without permission of the copyright owner.

• The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be

removed nor may the electronic watermark be modiﬁed without permission

of the copyright owner.

3. TERMINATION

This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFT-

WARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provi-

sions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate

automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termi-

nation, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accom-

panying written documents and all copies thereof.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA

As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible

media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in mate-

rials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days

from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire

liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media

if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days

with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media dam-

aged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT

PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY

IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE

You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your

sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS”

and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER

PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DIS-

CLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND

IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WAR-

RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.

SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING,

YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET

YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE

WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN

THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED.

6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PER-

MIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO

EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PER-

SON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,

EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARIS-

ING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-

WARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall

Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action

(whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFT-

WARE.

7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE

Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be

attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data

accompanying the Software, Yamaha identiﬁes any software and data as

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide

by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is

responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD

PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof.

•Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFT-

WARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL

IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR

A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the

THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

•Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including,

without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages,

expenses, lost proﬁts, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, mis-

use or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.

8. GENERAL

This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese

law without reference to principles of conﬂict of laws. Any dispute or proce-

dure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a

court of competent jurisdiction ﬁnds any portion of this Agreement to be unen-

forceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and

effect.

9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT

This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with

respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and

supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, writ-

ten or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or

revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a

fully authorized representative of Yamaha.

138 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT

By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which

will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product.

1. Deﬁnitions

In this License the following words and expressions have the

following meanings:

“License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if

permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this

agreement.

“Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One

Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius

Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK

“Product”: the Software and the Documentation.

“Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki,

Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or ﬁles

supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius

Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer.

“Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the

Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor.

2. License

2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable

license to use this Software in accordance with the

Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the

Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product

remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the

rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are

reserved.

2.2 You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the

Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make

or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part

of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form.

2.3 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,

(1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any

part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for

the purpose of error correction);

(2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the

whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or

incorporated into any other program, ﬁle or product, for any

purpose; or

(3) use the Software to create ﬁles in any format (other than

temporary ﬁles created and required by your computer’s

operating system or web browser), including without

limitation screen capture ﬁles, ﬁles generated from the

Software’s playback, graphics ﬁles and print ﬁles, for any

purpose, except for creating MIDI ﬁles (if permitted by the

Software) for private non-commercial use.

2.4 You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to,

decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the

Software in whole or in part for any purpose.

2.5 You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate,

convert, decode or reverse engineer any ﬁle capable of being

read by any copy or version of the Software or any data

transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in

whole or in part for any purpose.

2.6 The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any

right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or

any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity.

3. Copyright

3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and

in the components of the Product as between you and the

Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected

by copyright laws, national and international, and all other

applicable laws.

4. Disclaimer of Liability

4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed

hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all

warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or

implied, including without limitation any warranties that the

Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the

Documentation, is merchantable, or is ﬁt for any particular

purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any

liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including

without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and

loss of proﬁts, revenue or goodwill and any type of special,

indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in

connection with your installation and use of the Product.

5. Termination

5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your

destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to

terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you

of any condition of this License or of any of your

representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder.

Upon notiﬁcation of such termination by the Licensor, you will

immediately delete the Software from your computer and

destroy the Documentation.

6. Miscellaneous

6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of

the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder

shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial

exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or

further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power

or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in

connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies

provided by law.

6.2 You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or

otherwise transfer the Product to any third party.

6.3 You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with

the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on

www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time.

6.4 This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a ﬁnal

expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter

hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of

such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior

understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the

Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof.

6.5 (This section only applies if you are resident in the European

Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the

laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the

exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.

6.6 (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European

Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in

accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of

California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in

any way related or connected to this License shall be brought

and maintained only in the United States District Court for the

Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San

Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of

such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each

party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury

in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim),

whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related

or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof.

(License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007)

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 139

Speciﬁcations

Keyboards

• 88-key box type (A-1–C7), with Touch Response.

Display

• 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit)

Setup

• STANDBY/ON

• MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX

• LCD CONTRAST

Panel Controls

• SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER,

P.A.T. ON/OFF, LESSON L, LESSON R, LESSON START,

METRONOME ON/OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO,

FUNCTION, MUSIC DATABASE, HARMONY ON/OFF,

DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+],

[-], CATEGORY, Dial, REPEAT & LEARN (ACMP ON/OFF),

A-B REPEAT (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), PAUSE (SYNC START),

START/STOP, REW (MAIN/AUTO FILL), FF (SYNC STOP),

REGIST MEMORY ([MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2]),

SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A]), File Control [MENU],

File Control [EXECUTE], [EXIT], [LYRICS], [SCORE],

[CHORD FINGERING]

Realtime Control

• Pitch Bend Wheel

Voice

• 127 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices

• Polyphony: 32

• DUAL

• SPLIT

Style

• 160 Preset Styles + External files

• Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START,

START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,

MAIN/AUTO FILL

• Fingering: Multi Finger, Full Keyboard

• Style Volume

Music Database

• 300 + External files

Education Feature

• Dictionary

• Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn

Registration Memory

•8 banks x 2 types

Function

• VOLUME: Style Volume, Song Volume

• OVERALL: Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitiv-

ity, Pitch Bend Range, Chord Fingering

• MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level

• DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level

• SPLIT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level,

Chorus Level

• EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type,

Sustain

• HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume

• Performance assistant technology:

Performance assistant technology Type

• PC: PC Mode

• MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send,

Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out

• METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature

Denominator, Metronome Volume

• SCORE: Quantize

• LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade

• UTILITY: Demo Cancel, Language

Effects

• Reverb: 9 types

• Chorus: 4 types

• Harmony: 26 types

Song

• 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs

(70)

• Song Clear, Track Clear

• Song Volume

• Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE,

REW, FF, START/STOP

Performance assistant technology

• Chord, Chord/Free, Melody, Chord/Melody

Recording

• Song

User Song: 5 Songs

Recording Tracks: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE

MIDI

• Local On/Off • Initial Send • External Clock

• Keyboard Out • Style Out • Song Out

Auxiliary jacks

• PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB TO HOST,

USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN

Ampliﬁer

• 6W + 6W

Speakers

• 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2

Power Consumption

• 22W

Power Supply

• Adaptor: PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 1,340 x 422 x 145 mm (52-3/4” x 16-5/8” x 5-3/4”)

with keyboard stand:

1,354 x 485 x 775 mm (53-1/3” x 19-1/8” x 30-1/2”)

Weight

• 11.0kg (24 lbs. 4 oz.)

with keyboard stand: 17.0kg (37 lbs. 8 oz.)

Supplied Accessories

• Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM

• Keyboard Stand • Owner’s Manual • Footswitch FC5

• AC Power adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by

Yamaha)

* May not be included depending on your particular area.

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for infor-

mation purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or

modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.

Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in

every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Optional Accessories

• Headphones: HPE-150

140 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual

+/– .................................................. 14, 65

........................................................ 66

0–9 .................................................. 14, 65

A-B REPEAT ................................. 14, 85

ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 14, 26

CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] ........... 14, 65

Chord Fingering ............................. 14, 83

DC IN 12V ..................................... 12, 15

DEMO ............................................ 14, 33

Dial ................................................. 14, 65

DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 14, 18

EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 14, 56

EXECUTE ...................................... 14, 94

EXIT ............................................... 14, 66

FF ................................................... 14, 32

FILE CONTROL ........................... 14, 92

FUNCTION .................................... 14, 89

HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 14, 68

INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 14, 76

LCD CONTRAST .......................... 15, 67

LESSON L, R ................................. 14, 49

LESSON START ........................... 14, 48

LYRICS .......................................... 14, 36

MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 14, 76

MASTER VOLUME ..................... 13–14

MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 14, 87

MENU ............................................ 14, 92

METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 14, 22

MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 14, 55

P.A.T. ON/OFF ........................ 14, 38, 46

PAUSE ........................................... 14, 32

PC ....................................................... 103

PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 12, 15

PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 14, 71

PORTABLE GRAND .................... 14, 20

REC, 1–5, A ................................... 14, 58

REGIST MEMORY ....................... 14, 87

REPEAT & LEARN ...................... 14, 54

REW ............................................... 14, 32

SCORE ........................................... 14, 35

SONG ............................................. 14, 31

SONG MEMORY .......................... 14, 59

SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 14, 19

STANDBY/ON .............................. 13–14

START/STOP ................................ 14, 65

STYLE ............................... 14, 25–29, 76

SUSTAIN ....................................... 12, 15

SYNC START ......................... 14, 26, 77

SYNC STOP .................................. 14, 78

TEMPO/TAP ...................... 14, 22, 32, 72

USB TO DEVICE .................. 15, 92, 100

USB TO HOST ............................ 15, 100

VOICE ............................................ 14, 17

A-B Repeat ...........................................85

Accessories .............................................7

ACMP ...................................................26

Auto Accompaniment Range ................26

Auto-Accompaniment ..............26, 28, 30

Backup ..........................................63, 106

CD-ROM ............................................107

Chord ..................................28–30, 81–82

Chord Dictionary ..................................84

Chord Fingering ..............................30, 83

Chord root .............................................84

Chord type (Chord Dictionary) .............84

Chord type (performance

assistant technology) ...................37–38

Chord/Free type (performance

assistant technology) ...................37, 40

Chord/Melody type (performance

assistant technology) ...................37, 44

Chorus ...................................................70

Chorus Type .......................................133

Computer ............................101–102, 104

Default Setting ......................................89

Delete (File Control) .............................98

Delete (Song Track) ..............................62

Delete (User Song) ...............................61

Demo ....................................................33

Demo Cancel ........................................91

Display ............................................66–67

Double-Staff Score ...............................35

Drum Kit ...............................................21

Drum Kit List ......................................128

Dual Chorus Level ................................90

Dual Octave ..........................................90

Dual Pan ...............................................90

Dual Reverb Level ................................90

Dual Voice ............................................18

Dual Volume .........................................90

Easy Chords ..........................................30

Easy Song Arranger ..............................56

Effect Map ..........................................136

Effect Type List ..................................133

External Clock ..............................91, 102

External Song .......................................34

File Control .......................................... 92

File Name ............................................. 95

Flash Memory ...................................... 34

Foot Switch .......................................... 12

Format (File Control) ........................... 94

Function ................................... 66, 89–91

Function Display .................................. 66

Grade .................................................... 51

Harmony ............................................... 68

Harmony Type ................................... 133

Harmony Volume ................................. 91

Headphones .......................................... 12

Initial Send ......................................... 104

Initialization ......................................... 63

Keyboard Out ............................... 91, 102

Keyboard Stand Assembly ................... 10

Language .............................................. 16

Lesson .................................................. 48

Load ..................................................... 97

Local ............................................. 91, 102

L-Part ........................................... 91, 106

Lyric ..................................................... 36

Main Chorus Level ............................... 90

MAIN Display ...................................... 66

Main Octave ......................................... 90

Main Pan .............................................. 90

Main Reverb Level ............................... 90

Main Voice ........................................... 17

Main Volume ....................................... 90

Master EQ Type ............................. 74, 90

Measure ................................................ 67

Melody ........................................... 35, 47

Melody Score ....................................... 35

Melody type (performance

assistant technology) .................. 37, 42

Melody Voice ................................. 57, 86

Messages ............................................ 116

Index

Panel controls and terminals Alphabetical order

Index

DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 141

Metronome ........................................... 22

MIDI ................................................... 102

MIDI Data Format .............................. 136

MIDI Implementation Chart ............... 134

Music Database .................................... 55

Music Rest ............................................ 13

Mute ..................................................... 86

notation ................................................. 67

One Touch Setting ................................ 73

P.A.T. Type .................................... 37, 91

Panel Sustain .................................. 71, 90

PC Mode ............................................. 103

performance assistant technology ........ 37

Pitch Bend Range ................................. 90

Power Adaptor ..................................... 12

Preset Song ............................... 31, 33–34

Quantize ............................................... 91

Recording ............................................. 58

Registration Memory ........................... 87

Remote control ................................... 103

Repeat ............................................. 54, 85

Reverb .................................................. 69

Reverb Type ....................................... 133

R-Part ........................................... 91, 106

Save (File Control) ............................... 95

Score ....................................... 35, 47, 118

Single-Staff Score ................................ 35

SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 96

SMF Save ............................................. 96

Software Licensing Agreement .......... 137

Song ...................................................... 31

Song Clear ............................................ 61

Song List .............................................. 33

Song Memory ................................. 58–59

Song Out ....................................... 91, 102

Song Volume ........................................ 85

Specifications ..................................... 139

Split Chorus Level ................................ 90

Split Octave ..........................................90

Split Pan ................................................90

Split Point .......................................19, 79

Split Reverb Level ................................90

Split Voice ............................................19

Split Volume .........................................90

Standard Chords ...................................30

Style ..........................................25, 28, 76

Style File .........................................83, 97

Style List .............................................130

Style Out .......................................91, 102

Style Volume ........................................80

Sustain (Footswitch) .............................12

Sustain (Panel) ................................71, 90

Synchro Start ..................................26, 77

Synchro Stop .........................................78

Tempo .............................................32, 72

TimeSignature

(Denominator, Numerator) ...............23

Touch Response ....................................72

Touch Sensitivity ..................................72

Track .....................................................58

Track Clear ...........................................62

Transfer .......................................102, 104

Transpose ..............................................75

Troubleshooting ..........................112, 114

Tuning ...................................................75

USB-MIDI Driver .......................110–111

User file ..........................................95, 97

User File Save .......................................95

User Song .......................................34, 58

Voice .....................................................17

Voice List ...........................................124

XF .....................................................6, 36

XGlite .....................................................6

LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON

PORTABLE KEYBOARDS

(NP, NPV, PSRE, PSREW, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES)

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every

Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the

Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s

authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted

Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or

Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or

materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay

the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)

damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to

follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the

carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been

altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)

deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)

damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/

noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of

alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original

Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact

Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local

authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer

has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website

at www.Yamaha.com

. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of

the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase

document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found

ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon

receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE

APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to

state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,

Canada

Tel: +1-416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: +1-714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José

Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,

D.F., C.P. 03900

Tel: +52-55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –

Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,

Brazil

Tel: +55-11-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,

Madero Este-C1107CEK,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: +54-11-4119-7000

VENEZUELA

Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.

AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,

Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela

Tel: +58-212-943-1877

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,

P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, U.K.

Tel: +44-1908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: +41-44-3878080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: +48-22-880-08-88

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Sofia, Bulgaria

Tel: +359-2-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta

Tel: +356-2133-2093

NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/

LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: +31-347-358040

FRANCE

Yam a ha M u si c E uro p e

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: +33-1-6461-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: +39-02-93577-1

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231

Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain

Tel: +34-91-639-88-88

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,

Greece

Tel: +30-210-6686260

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial

Scandinavia

JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: +46-31-89-34-00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Denmark,

Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland

Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark

Tel: +45-44-92-49-00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Antaksentie 4

FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland

Tel: +358 (0)96185111

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway

Tel: +47-6716-7800

ICELAND

Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.

Sidumula 20

IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: +354-525-5050

CROATIA

Euro Unit D.O.O.

Slakovec 73

40305 Nedelisce

Tel: +38540829400

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.

Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,

Moscow, 121059, Russia

Tel: +7-495-626-5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

Yam a ha M u si c G ul f FZ E

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

TURKEY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi

Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz

Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey

Tel: +90-212-999-8010

CYPRUS

Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.

Nikis Ave 2k

1086 Nicosia

Tel: + 357-22-511080

Major Music Center

21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy

P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus

Tel: (392) 227 9213

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yam a h a M u si c G ul f FZ E

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: +86-400-051-7700

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: +852-2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Private Limited

Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,

Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,

Haryana, India

Tel: +91-124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: +62-21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,

Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea

Tel: +82-2-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.

No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: +60-3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited

Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: +65-6740-9200

TAIWAN

Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.

2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.

New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: +886-2-7741-8888

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: +66-2215-2622

VIETNAM

Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited

15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach

Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,

Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam

Tel: +84-8-3818-1122

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

http://asia.yamaha.com

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

VIC 3006, Australia

Tel: +61-3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: +64-9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

http://asia.yamaha.com

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI15

Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan

(For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Manual Development Department

WM36660 Published 02/2016 PO##*.*-**B0

Printed in China

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Documenttranscriptie

Owner’s Manual Keyboard Stand Assembly For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions on page 10 of this manual. EN SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Purchase Date Serial No. Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) 2 PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspæendingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålæenge netledningen siddr i en stikkontakt, som er t endt — også selvom der or slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : DGX-530/YPG-535 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) (2 wires) DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Use the specified adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. • Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. Location • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. • Do not place objects in front of the instrument’s air vent, since this may prevent adequate ventilation of the internal components, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. (3)-11 4 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 1/2 Connections Saving data • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Saving and backing up your data The panel settings and some other types of data are not retained in memory when you turn off the power to the instrument. Save data you want to keep to the Registration Memory (page 87.) Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to a USB storage device/or other external device such as a computer. (pages 95, 106) Backing up the USB storage device/external media • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two USB storage devices/external media. Handling caution • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ● Trademarks • The bitmap fonts used in this instrument have been provided by and are the property of Ricoh Co., Ltd. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. (3)-11 2/2 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 5 Copyright Notice The followings are the titles, credits and copyright notices for three (3) of the songs pre-installed in this electronic keyboard: Mona Lisa from the Paramount Picture CAPTAIN CAREY, U.S.A. Words and Music by Jay Livingston and Ray Evans Copyright © 1949 (Renewed 1976) by Famous Music Corporation International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved Composition Title : Against All Odds Composer’s Name : Collins 0007403 Copyright Owner’s Name : EMI MUSIC PUBLISHING LTD AND HIT & RUN MUSIC LTD All Rights Reserved, Unauthorized copying, public performance and broadcasting are strictly prohibited. Can’t Help Falling In Love from the Paramount Picture BLUE HAWAII Words and Music by George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore Copyright © 1961; Renewed 1989 Gladys Music (ASCAP) Worldwide Rights for Gladys Music Administered by Cherry Lane Music Publishing Company, Inc. International Copyright Secured All Rights Reserved This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. Panel Logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. STYLE FILE The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original style file format which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral Devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). 6 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Congratulations and thank you for purchasing the Yamaha DGX-530/YPG-535 Portable Grand! Please read this owner’s manual carefully before using the instrument in order to take full advantage of its various features. Make sure to keep this manual in a safe and handy place even after you finish reading, and refer to it often when you need to better understand an operation or function. Included Accessories The DGX-530/YPG-535 package includes the following items. Please check that you have them all. • • • • • • Music rest Accessory CD-ROM Owner’s manual (this book) Keyboard stand Footswitch AC Power Adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 7 Special Features of the DGX-530/YPG-535 Graded Soft Touch keyboard Just as on an actual piano, the lower keys are heavy in touch and the higher keys are light, with soft touch of digital keyboard for beginners. ■ Performance assistant technology Page 37 Play along with a song on the instrument’s keyboard and produce a perfect performance every time ... even if you play wrong notes! All you have to do is play on the keyboard—alternately on the left- and right-hand ranges of the keyboard, for example—and you’ll sound like a pro as long as you play in time with the music. And if you can’t play with both hands, you can still play the melody simply by tapping one key. ■ Play a Variety of Instrument Voices All you need is one finger! Page 17 With the DGX-530/YPG-535, the instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard can be changed to violin, flute, harp, or any of an extensive range of voices. You can change the mood of a song written for piano, for example, by using violin to play it instead. Experience a whole new world of musical variety. ■ Play Along with Styles Page 26 Want to play with full accompaniment? Try the auto-accompaniment Styles. The accompaniment styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering wide variety of styles from waltzes to 8-beat to euro-trance … and much more. Select a style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new styles to expand your musical horizons. ■ Easy Performance with Music Notation Display When you play back a song, the corresponding score will be shown on the display as the song plays. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the song contains lyric and chord data*, the lyrics and chords will also appear on the score display. * No lyrics or chords will appear on the display if the song you are using with the score display function does not contain the appropriate lyric and chord data. 8 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Page 35 Contents Copyright Notice ....................................................................... 6 Panel Logos ............................................................................. 6 Included Accessories ............................................................... 7 Special Features of the DGX-530/YPG-535............................. 8 Setting Up Basic Operation 64 Basic Operation ...................................................................... 64 The Displays ........................................................................... 66 MAIN Display Items ................................................................ 67 10 Keyboard Stand Assembly................................. 10 Power Requirements .............................................................. 12 Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) ............. 12 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)............................. 12 Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal)............................ 13 Turning the Power On ............................................................ 13 Panel Controls and Terminals 14 Front Panel ............................................................................. 14 Rear Panel ............................................................................. 15 Quick Guide Changing the Display Language 16 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 17 Select and Play a Voice—MAIN ............................................. 17 Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL .............................. 18 Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT 19 Play the Grand Piano Voice ................................................... 20 Fun Sounds 21 Drum Kits................................................................................ 21 Sound Effects ......................................................................... 21 The Metronome 22 Start the Metronome............................................................... 22 Adjusting the Metronome Tempo ........................................... 22 Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat............................................. 23 Adjusting the Metronome Volume .......................................... 24 Playing Styles 25 Select a Style Rhythm ............................................................ 25 Play Along with a Style ........................................................... 26 Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords .................................... 30 Using Songs 31 Select and Listen to a Song ................................................... 31 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause ...................... 32 Change the Song Tempo ....................................................... 32 Play the Demo Song .............................................................. 33 Types of Songs ...................................................................... 34 Displaying the Song Score ..................................................... 35 Display the Lyrics ................................................................... 36 The Easy Way to Play Piano 37 CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands.................................... 38 CHORD/FREE Type— Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only................ 40 MELODY Type—Play with One Finger .................................. 42 CHORD/MELODY— Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right ..... 44 Select a Song For a Lesson 48 Lesson 1—Waiting ................................................................. 49 Lesson 2—Your Tempo ......................................................... 52 Lesson 3—Minus One ............................................................ 53 Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn .......................... 54 Play Using the Music Database 55 Change a Song’s Style 56 Try Out the Easy Song Arranger ............................................ 56 Using the Easy Song Arranger ............................................... 56 Record Your Own Performance 58 Track Configuration ................................................................ 58 Recording Procedure ............................................................. 59 Song Clear—Deleting User Songs ......................................... 61 Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song .. 62 Backup and Initialization 63 Backup ................................................................................... 63 Initialization............................................................................. 63 Reference Play with a Variety of Effects 68 Adding Harmony ..................................................................... 68 Adding Reverb ........................................................................ 69 Adding Chorus ........................................................................ 70 Panel Sustain ......................................................................... 71 Pitch Bend .............................................................................. 71 Handy Performance Features 72 Tap Start ................................................................................. 72 Touch Response Sensitivity ................................................... 72 One Touch Setting.................................................................. 73 Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ............................... 74 Pitch Controls ......................................................................... 75 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 76 Pattern Variation (Sections).................................................... 76 Setting the Split Point ............................................................. 79 Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) ...................................................... 80 Adjusting the Style Volume..................................................... 80 Chord Basics .......................................................................... 81 Style File ................................................................................. 83 Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard .............................. 83 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ..................... 84 Song Settings 85 Song Volume .......................................................................... 85 A-B Repeat ............................................................................. 85 Muting Independent Song Parts ............................................. 86 Change the Melody Voice ...................................................... 86 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings 87 Saving to the Registration Memory ........................................ 87 Recalling a Registration Memory............................................ 88 The Functions 89 Selecting and Setting Functions ............................................. 89 Using USB Flash Memory 92 Connecting a USB Flash Memory .......................................... 92 Formatting USB Flash Memory .............................................. 94 Saving Data ............................................................................ 95 Convert a User Song to SMF Format and Save ..................... 96 Loading User Files and Style Files ......................................... 97 Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory .............................. 98 Playing Data on a USB Flash Memory ................................... 99 Connections 100 Connectors ........................................................................... 100 Connecting a Personal Computer ........................................ 101 Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer ..... 102 Remote Control of MIDI Devices .......................................... 103 Initial Send ............................................................................ 104 Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument ... 104 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide 107 Important Notices about the CD-ROM.................................. 107 CD-ROM Contents ............................................................... 108 System Requirements .......................................................... 109 Software Installation ............................................................. 109 Appendix Troubleshooting .................................................................... 114 Messages ............................................................................. 116 Scores .................................................................................. 118 Voice List .............................................................................. 124 Drum Kit List ......................................................................... 128 Style List ............................................................................... 130 Music Database List ............................................................. 131 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM.......................... 132 Effect Type List ..................................................................... 133 MIDI Implementation Chart................................................... 134 MIDI Data Format ................................................................. 136 Specifications ....................................................................... 139 Index ..................................................................................... 140 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 9 Setting Up Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand. These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from occurring to you and others. By following these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will provide you with safe and prolonged use. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop. • Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to become unstable or overturn, the keyboard to drop, or injury. • Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand may result in the object dropping or the stand overturning. • Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to drop. • Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn, the keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. Assembly Parts q 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) Back board Side boards w Joint connectors (4 pcs.) e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) Stand bases r 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) z Attach the stand bases. 1 w Joint connectors q 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws 10 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Making sure that the boards are facing the proper direction (the holes for the joint connectors should face inside). The left and right side boards are the same shape. Insert the joint connectors w into the holes as shown. The joint connectors have been installed properly if you can see the screw head on the connector. Attach the stand bases to the bottom of the side boards, using the 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws q. The left and right stand bases are the same shape, and there is no difference between their front-to-back orientation. If you have trouble screwing in the screws, use a screwdriver to rotate the joint connectors to the appropriate position—the → mark on the joint connectors indicates the location of the screw hole. Setting Up 2 x Attach the back board. e 6 x 30 mm roundhead screw Attach the back board, using the 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws e. CAUTION • Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the sharp metal fittings. c Put the keyboard on the stand. 3–4 Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and carefully place the keyboard on the side boards. Slowly move the keyboard so that the holes on the bottom of the keyboard are properly aligned with the holes on the angle brackets. CAUTION • Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your fingers caught between the keyboard and the stand parts. v Install the keyboard to the stand. r 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws r. ■ Post-assembly checklist Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the following points: • Are there any parts left over? ➔ If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct any errors you might have made. • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures? ➔ If not, move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you play it or move it? ➔ If so, properly tighten all screws. • Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or seems unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to the assembly instructions and diagrams and retighten all screws. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Make sure that the [STANDBY/ON] switch of the instrument is set to STANDBY. Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) only. The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. Connect the AC adaptor to the power supply jack. AC power adaptor AC outlet Make all necessary connections below BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting Headphones (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) WARNING • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION The instrument speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/ OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting before connecting them. Failure to observe these cautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC5 footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. 12 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Connecting to a Computer (USB Terminal) Connect the instrument’s USB terminal to the USB terminal of a computer, and you can transfer performance data and song files between the two (page 101). To use the USB data-transfer features you’ll need to do the following: • First, make sure the POWER switch on the instrument is set to OFF, then use an AB type USB cable to connect the instrument to the computer. After making the connections, turn the instrument’s power on. • Install the USB-MIDI driver on your computer. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on page 109. Turning the Power On Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [STANDBY/ON] switch to turn on the power. Press the [STANDBY/ON] switch again to turn the power OFF. CAUTION • Even when the switch is in the “STANDBY” position, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. CAUTION • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “WRITING!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. Backup data in the flash memory is loaded to the instrument when the power is turned on. If no backup data exists on flash memory, all instrument settings are restored to the initial factory defaults when the power is turned on. ● Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 13 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song Category List (page 33) Style Category List (page 130) u e i o q r w y t !1 !0 !3 !2 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8 !9 Front Panel q [STANDBY/ON] switch .................... page 13 @0 [SONG] button................................. page 31 w [MASTER VOLUME] control.... pages 13, 64 @1 [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button........................ page 56 e FILE CONTROL [MENU], [EXECUTE] buttons................. pages 92–98 @2 [STYLE] button................................ page 25 t [SCORE] button ............................... page 35 @4 Dial ............................................pages 65, 89 y [CHORD FINGERING] button ......... page 83 @5 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons......................................pages 65, 89 u [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button.................... page 38 i [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............ page 55 o [FUNCTION] button ................. pages 66, 89 !0 LESSON [L], [R], [START] buttons .............................. page 49 !1 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..... page 22 !2 [TEMPO/TAP] button ............... pages 32, 72 !3 SONG MEMORY [REC], [1]–[5], [A] buttons............... page 59 !4 [REPEAT & LEARN]/ [ACMP ON/OFF] button........... pages 54, 26 !5 [A-B REPEAT]/ [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .... pages 85, 76 !6 [REW]/ [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ....... pages 32, 76 !7 [FF]/[SYNC STOP] button ....... pages 32, 78 !8 [PAUSE]/ [SYNC START] button ............. pages 32, 77 !9 [START/STOP] button ....... pages 25, 32, 65 14 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual r @3 [VOICE] button ................................ page 17 f r [LYRICS] button ............................... page 36 @6 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons ....................pages 65, 89 @7 [DEMO] button................................. page 33 @8 [EXIT] button ................................... page 66 @9 REGIST MEMORY [MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2] buttons.. page 87 #0 [PORTABLE GRAND] button .......... page 20 #1 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button................... page 19 #2 [DUAL ON/OFF] button ................... page 18 #3 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button .......... page 68 #4 [PITCH BEND] wheel....................... page 71 #5 Drum Kit........................................... page 21 The illustrations next to each key indicate the drum and percussion instruments assigned to the keys when “Standard Kit 1” is selected. Panel Controls and Terminals Display (pages 66, 67) Music Database List (page 131) Voice Category List (page 124) @7 @0 @1 @4 @2 @3 @6 @5 #0 @8 #1 #2 #3 @9 #4 #5 Rear Panel #6 #7 #8 #9 $0 Rear Panel #6 CONTRAST knob............................. page 67 #8 SUSTAIN jack................................... page 12 #7 USB TO DEVICE terminal................ page 93 #9 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ................... page 12 USB TO HOST terminal ........... page 13, 100 $0 DC IN 12V jack................................. page 12 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 15 e d ck Gui ui Q Changing the Display Language Quick Guide This instrument allows you to select English or Japanese as the display language. The default display language is English, but if you switch to Japanese the lyrics, file names, demo display, and some messages will be displayed in Japanese where appropriate. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons a number of times until the “Language” item appears. r Press the [FUNCTION] button. f 1 The currently selected display language will appear below the “Language” item. When highlighted you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the language as required. Language item The currently selected language 3 Select a display language. The [+] button selects English and the [-] button selects Japanese. The language selection will be stored in the internal flash memory so that it is retained even when the power is turned off. 4 16 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to piano, organ, and other “standard” keyboard instruments, this instrument has a large range of voices that includes guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, sound effects … a wide variety of musical sounds. Select and Play a Voice—MAIN This procedure selects the main voice you will play on the keyboard. 1 Press the [VOICE] button. The main voice selection display will appear. The currently selected voice number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected voice number and name 2 Select the voice you want to play. While watching the highlighted voice name rotate the dial. The available voices will be selected and displayed in sequence. The voice selected here becomes the main voice. For this example select the “102 Flute” voice. Select 102 Flute 3 Play the keyboard. Adjusts volume. Try selecting and playing a variety of voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 17 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Play Two Voices Simultaneously—DUAL You can select a second voice which will play in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. The second voice is known as the “dual” voice. 1 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button. The [DUAL ON/OFF] button turns the dual voice on or off. When turned on the dual voice “DUAL” will appear in the MAIN display. The currently selected dual voice will sound in addition to the main voice when you play the keyboard. Voice Number 2 Press and hold the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The dual voice selection display will appear. Dual voice selection display The currently selected dual voice Hold for longer than a second 3 18 Select the desired dual voice. Watch the displayed dual voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the dual voice. For this example try selecting the “120 Vibraphone” voice. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Play the keyboard. Two voices will sound at the same time. Try selecting and playing a range of dual voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Play Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—SPLIT In the split mode you can play different voices to the left and right of the keyboard “split point”. The main and dual voices can be played to the right of the split point, while the voice played to the left of the split point is known as the “split voice”. The split point setting can be changed as required (page 79). Split point Split voice 1 Main voice and dual voice Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button. The [SPLIT ON/OFF] button turns the split voice on or off. When turned on the split voice “SPLIT” will appear in the MAIN display. The currently selected split voice will sound to the left of the keyboard split point. Voice Number 2 Press and hold the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second. The split voice selection display will appear. Split voice selection display The currently selected split voice Hold for longer than a second DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 19 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 3 Select the desired split voice. 4 Play the keyboard. Watch the highlighted split voice and rotate the dial until the voice you want to use is selected. The voice selected here becomes the split voice which will play to the left of the keyboard split point. For this example try selecting the “038 Folk Guitar” voice. Try selecting and playing a range of split voices. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Play the Grand Piano Voice When you just want to play piano, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The “001 Grand Piano” voice will be selected. NOTE • When you press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button all settings other than touch sensitivity are turned off. The dual and split voices will also be turned off, so only the Grand Piano voice will play over the entire keyboard. 20 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Fun Sounds This instrument includes a range of drum kits and unique sound effects you can use for entertainment. Laughter, babbling brooks, jet fly-bys, eerie effects, and much more. These sounds can be a great way to enhance the mood at parties. Drum Kits Drum kits are collections of drum and percussion instruments. When you select a violin or other normal instrument main voice, for example, all keys produce the sound of the same violin, only at different pitches. If you select a drum kit as the main voice, however, each key produces the sound of a different drum or percussion instrument. ◆ Drum Kit Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “128 Standard Kit 1”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Try out each key and enjoy the drum and percussion sounds! Don’t forget the black keys! You’ll hear a triangle, maracas, bongos, drums ... a comprehensive variety of drum and percussion sounds. For details on the instruments included in the drum kit voices (voice numbers 128 to 139), see the “Drum Kit List” on page 128. Sound Effects The sound effects are included in the drum kit voice group (voice numbers 138 and 139). When either of these voices are selected you will be able to play a range of sound effects on the keyboard. ◆ Sound Effect Selection Procedure ➔ (refer to steps 1 and 2 on page 17) 1 Press the [VOICE] button. 2 Use the dial to select “139 SFX Kit 2”. 3 Try out each key and enjoy the sound effects! As you try out the various keys you’ll hear the sound of a submarine, a telephone bell, a creaking door, and many other useful effects. “138 SFX Kit 1” includes lightning, running water, dogs barking, and others. Some keys do not have assigned sound effects, and will therefore produce no sound. For details on the instruments included in the SFX kit voices, see “SFX Kit 1” and “SFX Kit 2” in the “Drum Kit List” on page 129. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 21 e d ck Gui ui Q The Metronome The instrument includes a metronome with adjustable tempo and time signature. Play and set the tempo that is most comfortable for you. Start the Metronome Turn the metronome on and start it by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again. 4/4 Current setting Adjusting the Metronome Tempo 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the tempo setting. Tempo 2 22 Use the dial to select a tempo from 11 to 280. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Metronome Setting the Number of Beats per Measure, and the Length of Each Beat In this example we’ll set up a 5/8 time signature. 1 Press and hold the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to select the function “Time Signature–Numerator”. Hold for longer than a second Numerator (Number of beats per measure.) Denominator (The length of one beat.) 2 Use the dial to select the number of beats per measure. 3 Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the beat length function “Time Signature–Denominator”. 4 Use the dial to select the beat length. NOTE r f A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. The available range is from 0 through 60. Select 5 for this example. • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. Select the required length for each beat: 2, 4, 8, or 16 (half note, quarter note, eighth note, or 16th note). Select 8 for this example. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 23 The Metronome Adjusting the Metronome Volume r 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the Metronome Volume item. f 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Metronome volume 3 24 Use the dial to set the metronome volume as required. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Playing Styles This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 160 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures (see page 130 for a complete list of the available styles). In this section we’ll learn how to use the auto accompaniment features. Select a Style Rhythm Most styles includes a rhythm part. You can select from a wide variety of rhythmic types—rock, blues, Euro trance, and many, many more. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. 1 Press the [STYLE] button. The style select display will appear. The currently selected style number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected style 2 Select a style. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. Use the dial to select the style you want to use. A list of all the available styles is provided on page 130. NOTE • An external style file loaded into style number 161 can be selected and used in the same way as the internal styles. The style file must be loaded into style number 161 after transferring it to the instrument from a computer, or after connecting a USB flash memory device containing the style file to the instrument. File transfer instructions can be found on page 104, and load instructions are provided on page 97. The style rhythm will start playing. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. NOTE • Style numbers 131, 143–160 have no rhythm part and therefore no rhythm will play if you use them for the above example. For these styles first turn auto accompaniment on as described on page 26, press the [START/STOP] button, and the accompaniment bass and chord parts will begin playing when you play a key to the left of the keyboard split point. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Styles Play Along with a Style You learned how to select a style rhythm on the preceding page. Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 2 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired style. Turn automatic accompaniment on. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. This icon appears when automatic accompaniment is on. NOTE ● When automatic accompaniment is on ... The area of the keyboard to the left of the split point (54 : F#2) becomes the “auto accompaniment region” and is used only for specifying the accompaniment chords. Split point (54 : F#2) Auto accompaniment region 3 Turn sync start on. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the sync start function on. Flashes when sync start is on. 26 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual • The keyboard split point can be changed as required: refer to page 79. Playing Styles When sync start is on, the bass and chord accompaniment included in a style will start playing as soon as you play a note to left of the keyboard split point. Press the button a second time to turn the sync start function off. 4 Play a left-hand chord to start the style. You can still “play” chords even if you don’t actually know any chords. This instrument will recognize even a single note as a chord. Try playing from one to three notes at the same time to the left of the split point. The accompaniment will change according to the left-hand notes you play. Try this! Scores for some chord progressions are provided on page 28. These examples should help you get a feel for what types of chord progressions sound good with the styles. Split point Auto accompaniment region 5 Play a variety of left-hand chords while playing a melody with your right hand. Split point Auto accompaniment region 6 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop style playback when you’re done. You can switch style “sections” to add variety to the accompaniment. Refer to “Pattern Variation (Sections)” on page 76. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 27 Playing Styles Styles Are More Fun When You Understand Chords Chords, created by playing multiple notes at the same time, are the basis for harmonic accompaniment. In this section we’ll take a look at sequences of different chords played one after another, or “chord sequences.” Since each chord has it’s own unique “color”—even if it’s different fingerings of the same chord—the chords you choose to use in your chord progressions have a huge influence on the overall feel of the music you play. On page 26 you learned how to play colorful accompaniments using styles. Chord progressions are vital to creating interesting accompaniments, and with a little chord know-how you should be able to take your accompaniments to a new level. On these pages we’ll introduce three easy-to-use chord progressions. Be sure to try them out with the instrument’s accompaniment styles. The style will respond to the chord progression you play, effectively creating a complete song. ■Playing the Chord Progressions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Play the scores with the left hand. Before playing the scores follow steps 1 through 3 of “Play Along with a Style” on page 26. * The scores provided here are not standard song scores, but rather simplified scores that indicate which notes to play to produce the chord progressions. Split point Play to the left of the split point. Recommended Style 041 Euro Trance —Dance music with simple chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. F C G Am This is a simple-but-effective chord progression. When you play through to the end of the score, start again from the beginning. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button and the auto accompaniment function will create a perfect ending. 28 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Playing Styles Recommended Style 148 Piano Boogie —3-chord boogie-woogie— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. C F C G F C Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. This progression provides varied harmonic backing with just three chords. When you get a feel for the progression in the score, try changing the order of the chords! Recommended Style 096 Bossa Nova —Bossa nova with jazz-style chords— Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Dm Bm7 5 G7 CM7 FM7 E7 Am A7 This progression includes jazzy “two-five” (II-V) changes. Try playing it through several times. When you’re ready to stop playing press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 29 Playing Styles Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords There are two ways of playing auto-accompaniment chords: ● Easy Chords ● Standard Chords The instrument will automatically recognize the different chord types. The function is called Multi Fingering. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto-accompaniment on (page 26). The keyboard to the left of the split point (default: 54/F#2) becomes the “accompaniment range”. Play the accompaniment chords in this area of the keyboard. Split point (default: 54/F#2) Db Eb F# G# Bb Db Eb F# C D E F GA B C D E F Accompaniment range Root notes and the corresponding keys ■Easy Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. ■Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● This method lets you produce accompaniment by playing chords using normal fingerings in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. ● How to play Standard Chords [Example for “C” chords] C (9) C C • To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C M7 C M7 (9) C6 C6 Cm C sus4 Cm Cm (b5) ( C aug C M7aug C m6 C m7 C mM7 C mM7 ( ) C M7 C ) ) C M7 ( ) ( • To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. (#11) (9) (b5) C7 ( ( ) ) • To play a major chord Press the root note of the chord. ) ( • To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). (9) (9) (11) C m7 C m7 (9) (b5) C m7 C mM7 C7 C7 ) (9) C7 ) ) C7 (#9) (b5) C7 ( C 7sus4 C7 ) ) ) ( ( ) (13) C7 ( C sus2 ( ) C 7aug (b13) (b9) ( (#11) C7 C dim7 C dim ( (b5) ( ) ( ) ( ( ) ( ) C m7 * Notes enclosed in parentheses ( ) are optional; the chords will be recognized without them. 30 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q Using Songs With this instrument the term “song” refers the data that makes up a piece of music. You can simply enjoy listening to the 30 internal songs, or use them with just about any of the many functions provided—the performance assistant technology feature, lessons, and more. The songs are organized by category. In this section we’ll learn how to select and play songs, and briefly describe the 30 songs provided. Song Listen Lesson Record Select and Listen to a Song 1 Press the [SONG] button The song selection display will appear. The currently selected song number and name will be highlighted. The currently selected song number and name 2 NOTE Select a song. Select a song after referring to the preset song category list on page 33. Use the dial to select the song you want to listen to. • Song files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Song (Song numbers 36–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 104. The song highlighted here can be played DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 31 Using Songs 3 Listen to the song. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button again. Song start! Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the song. NOTE • When an A-B repeat range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. REW Press the fast reverse button to rapidly return to an earlier point in the song. FF Press the fast forward button to rapidly skip ahead to a later point in the song. PAUSE Press the pause button to pause playback. Change the Song Tempo When using the song, you can change the tempo as required. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button. The tempo display will appear and you can use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0] to [9] number buttons to set to tempo to anywhere from 011 and 280 quarter-note beats per minute. You can return to the original tempo by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [-] buttons. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 32 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using Songs Play the Demo Song Press the [DEMO] button. The demo song will start playing. Listen to some of the outstanding instrument voices provided! The demo song will automatically repeat from the beginning after it has played all the way through. You can stop demo playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. ● Song List These 30 songs include songs that effectively demonstrate the instrument’s Easy Song Arranger feature, songs that are ideally suited for use with the performance assistant technology feature, and more. The “Suggested Uses” column provides some ideas as to how the songs can most effectively used. Category Main Demo Voice Demo Function Demo Piano Solo No. CHORD JetSet 2 CHORD Winter Serenade 3 CHORD Take off 4 CHORD Live! Grand Demo 5 CHORD Live! Orchestra Demo 6 CHORD Cool! Rotor Organ Demo 7 CHORD Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano Demo 8 CHORD Modern Harp & Sweet! Soprano Demo 9 CHORD Hallelujah Chorus 10 CHORD Ave Maria 11 CHORD Nocturne op.9-2 12 For Elise 13 Maple Leaf Rag 14 Piano Ensemble Piano Accompaniment CHORD Name 1 Suggested Uses The songs in this category have been created to give you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument. They’re great for listening, or for use with the various features. These songs features some of the instrument’s many useful voices. They make maximum use of the characteristics of each voice, and might serve as inspiration for your own compositions. Use these songs to experience some of the instrument’s advanced features: song number 9 for the easy song arranger, and songs 10 and 11 for the performance assistant technology feature. These piano solo pieces are ideally suited for use as lesson songs. Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair 15 CHORD Amazing Grace 16 CHORD Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans) 17 Piano Concerto No.21 2nd mov. 18 CHORD Scarborough Fair 19 CHORD Old Folks at Home 20 CHORD Ac Ballad (Against All Odds: Collins 0007403) 21 CHORD Ep Ballad 22 CHORD Boogie Woogie 23 CHORD Rock Piano 24 CHORD Salsa 25 CHORD Country Piano 26 CHORD Gospel R&B 27 CHORD Medium Swing 28 CHORD Jazz Waltz 29 CHORD Medium Bossa 30 CHORD SlowRock (Can’t Help Falling In Love: George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore) A selection of piano ensemble songs that are also well suited for use as lesson songs. When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these are the songs to do it with. This is ability you’ll need if you’re invited to play with a band. These songs allow you to practice backing parts one hand at a time, which can be the easiest way to master this important skill. : Includes chord data. The scores for the internal songs—except for songs 1–11, and song 16, 20 and 30 which is copyrighted, are provided in the Song Book on the CD-ROM. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual. Some of the classic and/or traditional songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 33 Using Songs Types of Songs The following three types of songs can be used by the DGX-530/YPG-535. ● Preset Songs (the 30 songs built into the instrument) ................Song numbers 001–030. ● User Songs (recordings of your own performances) ..................Song numbers 031–035. ● External song files (song data transferred from a computer*) ...Song numbers 036–. * The Accessory CD-ROM includes a selection of 70 MIDI songs. See page 105 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. The chart below shows the basic processes flow for using the preset songs, user songs, and external song files from storage to playback. Hint! : You can have someone play a piece and temporarily save it in a user bank as a user song, then save it as SMF format to the USB memory from where it can be used as a lesson song. Computer Your own performance USB flash memory Song Record Transfer (page 58) (page 104) Song Connect (page 100) DGX-530/YPG-535 Song Storage locations Preset Songs (001–030) User Songs (031–035) The 30 songs built into the instrument. Song Flash Memory Song SMF conversion Save Play NOTE • User songs cannot produce score display as they are. If you convert a user song file to SMF and save it to USB flash memory, however, it becomes capable of producing score display and can be used with the lesson features. NOTE • Different flash memory areas are used to store user songs and external song files transferred from a computer. User songs cannot be directly transferred to the external song file flash memory area, and vice versa. 34 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual USB (036–) Song Using Songs Displaying the Song Score This instrument is capable of display the scores of songs. Scores are displayed for the 30 internal preset songs as well as songs stored in USB flash memory or flash memory. And although user songs you record yourself cannot display a score as is, they can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI File) format and stored to USB flash memory, from where they can be played with score display. 1 2 Select a song. Follow steps 1 and 2 of the procedure described on page 31. Press the [SCORE] button and a single-staff score will appear. There are two types of score display: single-staff and double-staff. These are alternately selected each time the [SCORE] button is pressed. NOTE • Both chords and lyrics will be shown in single-staff score display of a song that includes chord and lyric data. • When there are many lyrics they may be displayed in two rows a measure. • Some lyrics or chords may be abbreviated if the selected song has a lot of lyrics. • Small notes that are hard to read may be easier to read after you use the quantize function (page 91). Single-staff Marker Melody score Chord Lyrics NOTE • No lyrics are shown in doublestaff. Double-staff 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. The song will begin playing. The triangular will move across the top of the score to indicate the current location. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 35 Using Songs Display the Lyrics If a song contains lyric data, the lyrics can be made to appear on the display. No lyrics will be displayed for a song that contains no lyric data even if the [LYRICS] button is pressed. 1 Select a song. 2 Press the [LYRICS] button. Select a song between 16, 20, and 30 by performing steps 1 and 2 described on page 31. The title, lyricist, and composer of the song will appear on the display. NOTE • Songs downloaded from the Internet or commercially available song files, including XF format files (page 6), are compatible with the lyrics display features as long as they are standard MIDI file format files containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible with some files. NOTE • If the lyrics display shows garbled characters, try changing the display language (page 16). Song title, lyricist, and composer. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. The song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the display. The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the song. Lyrics and chord display ■ Preset Songs That Can be Used For Lyrics Display Number 36 Name 016 Mona Lisa (Jay Livingston and Ray Evans) 020 Against all odds (Collins 0007403) 030 Can’t Help Falling In Love (George David Weiss, Hugo Peretti and Luigi Creatore) DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e d ck Gui ui Q The Easy Way to Play Piano This instrument includes a performance assistant technology feature that lets you play along with a song and sound like a great pianist (even though you might be making lots of mistakes)! In fact, you can play any notes and still sound good! You could even just tap one key and the results would be a beautiful melody. So even if you can’t play piano and can’t read a note of music, you can have some musical fun. Performance assistant technology offers four selectable types. Select the type that produces the best results for you. ● Chord ...................... No matter where or what you play, the result will be musical, well-balanced sound. This type offers the greatest freedom, allowing you to play anything with both your left and right hands. ● Chord/Free........... If you can play simple right-hand melodies but have trouble with lefthand chords, this is the type for you. The Chord type applies to only the left-hand section of the keyboard, allowing you to easily play chords to support the melody you are playing with your right hand. Split point Play your own melody with the right hand. ● Melody ................... This type lets you play the melody of the selected song by playing any keys with just one finger. Start playing melodies right away, even if you’ve never played a keyboard instrument before! ● Chord/Melody .... Play the melody of the selected song with one finger on the right-hand section of the keyboard, and play chords on the left-hand section of the keyboard using the Chord type. Split point Refer to page 46 for more information on using performance assistant technology to help you play. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 37 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD Type—Play with Both Hands 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. 2 Select the CHORD type. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “010 Ave Maria”. When the Chord type is selected, features only available for this song can be seen in the display! NOTE • Using Songs (page 31) The song displayed here will be played. ● What is a Song? You know the normal meaning of this word, but in this instrument the term “Song” refers to the data that makes up a complete song. The performance assistant technology features uses the chord and melody data, and should always be used with a song (page 31). 38 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will play repeatedly. Listen to the basic pattern for four measures while getting a feel for the basic pattern, then begin playing yourself from the fifth measure. The keys you should play will be shown in the display. 5 Play on the keyboard. Before After Try playing the score on the left with both hands. You can even play the same keys over and over: C, E, G, C, E, G, C, E. You’ll notice that at measure five the notes will come out according to the score on the right. Keep playing, and performance assistant technology Chord type will continue to “correct” the notes that you play. This is the performance assistant technology Chord type. NOTE • The score for Ave Maria is provided on page 120. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 39 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/FREE Type—Applying the Chord Type to the Left Hand Only 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. 2 Select the CHORD/FREE type. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord/Free Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Free type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. For this example try selecting the “011 Nocturne”. NOTE • Using Songs (page 31) The song displayed here will be played. 40 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The left-hand keys you should play will be shown on the display. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play the Nocturne melody with your right hand. Continually play an FA-C arpeggio with your left hand as indicated by the score shown in the display. Although you’re repeatedly playing the same notes with your left hand, the actual notes produced will change to match the music. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Free type. NOTE • The score for Nocturne is provided on page 122. Press the [SCORE] button if you want to see the score for the right-hand part in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 41 The Easy Way to Play Piano MELODY Type—Play with One Finger See page 46 for some hints on how to play melodies. 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. 2 Select the MELODY type. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Select Melody Hold for longer than a second Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. NOTE • Using Songs (page 31) The song displayed here will be played. 42 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. Because the Melody type has been selected, the song melody will not sound. You can enjoy playing the melody yourself (step 5). Song start! 5 Play on the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then tap a key with one finger of your right hand in time with the music. You can play any key. If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. Sounds like a melody! How does it sound? You’ve played the melody using only one finger thanks to the performance assistant technology Melody type! You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 43 The Easy Way to Play Piano CHORD/MELODY—Chord Type with the Left Hand, Melody with the Right 1 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button. 2 Select the CHORD/MELODY type. This turns on the performance assistant technology feature. The indicator lights when the performance assistant technology feature is on. Hold for longer than a second Select Chord/Melody Press and hold the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button for longer than a second so that the performance assistant technology type appears. Select the Chord/Melody type by using the dial. 3 Select a song. Press the [SONG] button, and the Song Select display appears. Select a song by using the dial. NOTE • Using Songs (page 31) The song displayed here will be played. 44 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Easy Way to Play Piano 4 Press the [START/STOP] button. Song playback will begin. The basic pattern will repeat. Listen to eight measures while memorizing the basic pattern. It’s your turn to play the part from the ninth measure. 5 Play on the keyboard. Play to the right of the split point with your right hand, and to the left of the split point with your left hand. Split point With this type notes played on the left-hand side of the split point will actually sound an octave higher. Play along with the rhythm of the song melody with your right hand. You can play any keys as long as you’re playing to the right of the split point. At the same time play accompaniment-like chords and phrases with your left hand. No matter what you play, you’ll produce the song melody with your right hand and beautiful chords and phrases with your left hand. This is the performance assistant technology Chord/Melody type. If you want to play the melody with the melody score, press the [SCORE] button to call up the melody score in the display. You can stop song playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 6 Press the [P.A.T. ON/OFF] button to turn the performance assistant technology feature off. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 45 The Easy Way to Play Piano Use the Performance Assistant to Play Like a Pro! Here are a few hints for using the Chord type. If you select Chord/Free or Chord/Melody, the left-hand section of the keyboard becomes the Chord type section, so use these hints on the lefthand section of the keyboard. To begin, try to feel the rhythm of the song. Then, with your hands spread as shown in the illustration, simply play the keyboard alternately with your left and right hands (any notes will do). The chord information included in the song is displayed in the lower area of the MAIN display. You will get even better results if you match your left-hand rhythm to rhythm of the chord indicator in the display. Sounds like you’re playing the right notes! How does it sound? You’ll get acceptable results no matter where you play thanks to the performance assistant technology Chord type! Next try the three playing methods illustrated below. Different ways of playing produce different results. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 1. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. ● Play with the left and right hands at the same timing—type 2. Play 1 note at a time with your right hand (for example: index finger → middle finger → ring finger). Once you get a feel for it, try playing chords with your left hand and a melody with your right ... or any other combination. 46 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual ● Play alternately with the left and right hands—type 3. Play 3 notes at once with your right hand. The Easy Way to Play Piano Make Use of the Score in the Melody Type. If you want to play the melody with the correct rhythm, use the onscreen score feature. Displaying the Score. After performing steps 1 to 4 on page 42, press the [SCORE] button. The melody score will appear. Marker Chord Melody The marker will indicate the current position in the score during playback. If you play a key each time the marker appears above a note in the score you will be able to play the melody with the correct “original” rhythm. Play while watching the marker ● Songs That Can Be Used With the performance assistant technology. When the Chord type is selected the performance assistant technology can only be used with songs that include chord data. When the Melody type is selected the performance assistant technology will only work with songs that include melody data. In order to find out if a song includes the required data, first select the song and then press the [SCORE] button. If chords appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Chord type or any combination type that includes the Chord type. If melody appear on the display when you press the [SCORE] button you can use the Melody type or any combination type that includes the Melody type. ● External Songs and the performance assistant technology. Songs downloaded from the Internet can also be used with the performance assistant technology as long as they include the required chord and/or melody data. See page 105 for instructions on how to transfer the songs to the instrument. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 47 e d ck Gui ui Q Select a Song For a Lesson Yamaha Education Suite You can select song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. You can also use songs (only SMF format 0) downloaded from the Internet and saved to flash memory. (page 104) During the lesson you can play as slowly as you like, and you can even play wrong notes. Song playback will slow down to a speed you can handle. It’s never too late to start learning! Lesson Flow: Select a song from the Piano Solo, Piano Ensemble category! Select the song you want to learn. Select the part you want to work on (right hand, left hand, both hands). Select lesson 1, 2, or 3. Lesson start! The practice methods: ● Lesson 1 ..............Learn to play the correct notes. ● Lesson 2 ..............Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. ● Lesson 3 ..............Learn to play the correct notes at the correct timing along with the song. 48 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 1—Waiting In this lesson, try playing the correct notes. Play the note shown in the display. The song will wait until you play the right note. 1 Select a song for your lesson. 2 Press [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [SONG] button, and rotate the dial to select the song you want to use for your lesson. As listed on page 33 there are a variety of song types. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Select R for right-hand lesson. Select L for left-hand lesson. Select LR for bothhands lesson. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 49 Select a Song For a Lesson 4 Start Lesson 1. NOTE Press the LESSON [START] button to select Lesson 1. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... An explanation of the selected lesson will appear on the display for a few seconds before the lesson begins. • If the score display is not ready by the time the explanation display disappears, prepare-inprogress message will appear on the display until the score is ready. In this case the “R1” indicates that righthand lesson 1 has been selected. (Lesson 1) (Lesson 2) (Lesson 3) (Song Lesson off) Song playback will begin automatically when you select Lesson 1. Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The next note to be played is indicated by a dot (●) on the appropriate key of the graphic on-screen keyboard. When you play the correct note the marker will move to the next key to be played. Playback will pause and wait for you to play the correct note. The triangular marker (▼) above the score indicates playback progress. ▼ Marker Left-hand part ● Marker 50 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) Select a Song For a Lesson ● Shifting the keyboard left or right. The hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by pressing the [+] or [-] button. The displayed range (61 keys) Actual keyboard range (DGX-530/YPG-535 = 88 keys) 61 keys of the keyboard’s range are shown on the display. The DGX-530/ YPG-535 actually have 88 keys. In some songs that include very high or low notes, those notes may fall outside the displayed range and may not be shown on the display. In such cases an “over” indicator appear to the left or right of the graphic keyboard. Use the [+] or [-] button to shift the keyboard left or right so you can see the notes (the ● marker will appear on the appropriate key in the display). Notes that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson. 5 Stop the Lesson mode You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 1, move on to Lesson 2. ■See How You’ve Done ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● When the lesson song has played all the way through your performance will be evaluated in 4 levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. “Excellent!” is the highest evaluation. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION Grade item (page 91). DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 51 Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 2—Your Tempo Learn to play the correct notes with the correct timing. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 49). 2 Start Lesson 2. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... In this case the “R2” indicates that right-hand lesson 2 has been selected. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 2 is selected. The triangular marker will appear in the score display, and will move to indicate the current note in the song. Try to play the notes at the correct timing. As you learn to play the right notes at the right timing the tempo will increase until eventually you’ll be playing at the song’s original tempo. Play while following the score marker Left-hand part Right-hand part (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Once you’ve mastered Lesson 2, move on to Lesson 3. 52 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Select a Song For a Lesson Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the song. 1 Select the song and part you want to practice (steps 1 and 3 on page 49). 2 Start Lesson 3. Each time the LESSON [START] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: Lesson 1 → Lesson 2 → Lesson 3 → Off → Lesson 1 ... In this case the “R3” indicates that right-hand lesson 3 has been selected. Song playback will begin automatically when Lesson 3 is selected. Play along while listening to the song. The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to play. ▼ Marker Left-hand part Right-hand part ● Marker (In the case of a right-hand lesson) 3 Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 53 Select a Song For a Lesson Practice Makes Perfect—Repeat and Learn Use this feature when you want to start again just ahead of a section on which you made a mistake, or to repeatedly practice a section you find difficult. Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during a lesson. The song location will move back four measures from the point at which you pressed the button, and playback will begin after a one-measure count-in. Playback will continue up to the point at which you pressed the [REPEAT & LEARN] button, and then jump back four measures and begin again after a count-in. This process will repeat, so all you have to do is press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button when you make a mistake in order to repeat practice of that section until you get it right e Jump back 4 measures and repeat playback q w Song playback direction Oops! A mistake! 54 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Press immediately NOTE • You can change the number of measures the Repeat and learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1]–[9] during repeat playback. e d ck Gui ui Q Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best voice and style for the type of music you want to play ... simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. A Music Database list will appear in the display. 2 Select a Music Database. 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. Referring to the list on the panel or Music Database List on page 131 of the manual, use the dial to select a music database. Select one that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For this example select the “158 Patrol”. NOTE • Music Database (MDB) files transferred from a computer or stored on a USB flash memory device connected to the instrument can be selected and used in the same way as the internal Music Databases (MDB numbers 301–). File transfer instructions are provided on page 104. The jazz style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the split point (page 26). Refer to pages 28–30 for information about playing chords. Split Point If you press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display at this point you can check the assigned voice and style. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 55 e d ck Gui ui Q Change a Song’s Style In addition to each song’s default style, you can select any other style to play the song with the Easy Song Arranger feature. This means that you can play a song that is normally a ballad, for example, as a bossa nova, as a hip-hop tune, etc. You can create totally different arrangements by changing the style with which a song is played. You can also change the song’s melody voice and the keyboard voice for a complete change of image. Try Out the Easy Song Arranger You can try out the Easy Song Arranger feature using the internal Hallelujah Chorus song. Press the [SONG] button and use the dial to select “009 Hallelujah Chorus.” Press the [START/STOP] button begin playback of the song. An explanation of the Easy Song Arranger feature will appear on the display. As the song progresses the styles will change, changing the overall image of the song. Keep in mind that you can enjoy using Easy Song Arranger with other songs as well—any songs that include chord data. NOTE • The score for Hallelujah Chorus is provided on page 118. Using the Easy Song Arranger 1 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The Song Select display will appear. The currently selected song name and number will be highlighted. The currently selected song number and name are displayed here. 2 56 Select a Song. Use the dial to select the song you want to arrange. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Change a Song’s Style 3 Listen to the song. NOTE Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the song. Move on to the next step while the song is playing. • When playing song numbers 010, 011, and 020 to 030 while using the Easy Song Arranger, melody tracks will be automatically muted and no melody will sound. In order to hear the melody tracks you will need to press the SONG MEMORY buttons [3] to [5]. Song start! 4 Press the [EASY SONG ARRANGER] button. The Style Select display will appear. The currently selected style name and number will be highlighted. The currently selected style number and name are displayed here. 5 6 Select a style. Rotate the dial and listen to how the song sounds with different styles. As you select different styles the song will remain the same while only the styles change. When you have selected a suitable style move on to the next step while the song is still playing (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button). NOTE • Because the Easy Song Arranger uses song data you can’t specify chords by playing in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. The [ACMP ON/ OFF] button will not function. • If the time signature of the song and style are different, the time signature of the song will be used. Select a voice part. If you press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second a voice list will appear. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The Melody R and Melody L displays will be selected alternately each time you press the [VOICE] button. The currently selected melody voice will be displayed. Hold for longer than a second NOTE • The Difference Between 7 MELODY R and MELODY L ... Select a voice you want to play as a song melody. Use the dial to change the melody voice. As you select different melody voices the song will remain the same while only the melody voice changes (if you have stopped the song, start it again by pressing the [START/STOP] button). Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accompaniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the melody part played by the left hand. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 57 e d ck Gui ui Q Record Your Own Performance You can record up to 5 of your own performances and save them as user songs 031 through 035. Once your performances have been saved as user songs, they can be converted to SMF (Standard MID File) format files and saved to USB flash memory (page 96) and used with score display. So when inspiration strikes and you create a great melody, you can save it in both listenable and written score form. ■ Recordable Data You can record to a total of 6 tracks: 5 melody tracks and 1 style (chord) track. Each track can be recorded individually. ● Melody Track [1]–[5] ...........Record the melody parts. ● Style Track [A] .................... Records the chord part. NOTE • Up to approximately 10,000 notes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the melody tracks. Up to approximately 5,500 chord changes can be recorded for the five user songs if you record only to the style track. • User songs cannot display a score as is, but they can be converted to SMF (Standard MIDI File) format and stored to USB flash memory (page 96), from which they can be played with score display. Track Configuration To record your own performance, first use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to specify the track(s) you want to record on. The track you record on determines the part that plays back later. Melody Chords Specify track(s) and record • Track [1]—Will play back as the right-hand melody part (MELODY R) Track 1 Right-hand melody Track 2 Track 3 Left-hand melody Track 4 Track 5 Other performance data Track A Style • Track [2]—Will play back as the left-hand melody part (MELODY L) • Tracks [3]–[5]—Will play back as “other” performance data. • Track [A]—Will play back as the Style (auto-accompaniment) part. The parts played by each track when a user song is played back. NOTE • The Difference Between MELODY R and MELODY L ... Songs are a combination of a melody and an auto-accompaniment style. Normally “melody” refers to the right-hand part, but in this instrument “melody” parts are provided for both the right and left hands. MELODY R is the melody part played by the right hand, and MELODY L is the melody part played by the left hand. 58 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Record Your Own Performance Recording Procedure 1 From the MAIN display press the [SONG] button, then use the dial to select the user song number (031–035) you want to record to. Rotate the dial to select a song number between 031 and 035. 2 Select the track(s) you want to record to and confirm your selection on the display. ◆ Record a Melody Track and the Accompaniment Track Together Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. Next, press the [A] button while holding the [REC] button. The selected tracks will be highlighted in the display. CAUTION • If you record to track that contains previously-recorded data the previous data will be overwritten and lost. NOTE • Style accompaniment is automatically turned on when you select the style track [A] for recording. • Style accompaniment cannot turned on or off while recording is in progress. Press and hold ◆ Record a Melody track Press the melody track button [1]–[5] you want to record to while holding the [REC] button. The selected track will be highlighted in the display. NOTE • If style accompaniment is on and track [A] has not yet been recorded, the style track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when a melody track is selected. If you only want to record a melody track, be sure to turn the style track [A] off. To cancel recording to a selected track, press that track button a second time. Style accompaniment cannot be turned on or off while recording is in progress. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 59 Record Your Own Performance 3 Recording will start when you play on the keyboard. You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. Current measure Recording starts 4 Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] or [REC] button. or If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button while recording the style track an appropriate ending pattern will play and then recording will stop. When recording stops the current measure number will return to 001 and the recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box border. ● To Record Other Tracks Repeat steps 2 through 4 to record any of the remaining tracks. By selecting an unrecorded track—SONG MEMORY buttons [1]–[5], [A]—you can record the new track while listening to previously recorded tracks (the playback tracks will appear in the display). You can also mute previously recorded tracks (the muted tracks will not appear in the display) while recording new tracks. ● To Re-record a Track Simple select the track you want to re-record for recording in the normal way. The new material will overwrite the previous data. 5 When the recording is done ... ◆ To Play Back a User Song User songs are played back in the same way as regular songs (page 31). 1 Press the [SONG] button from the MAIN display. 2 The current song number/name will be highlighted—use the dial to select the user song (031–035) you want to play. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. ◆ To Save a User Song to USB flash memory ➔ page 95 ◆ To save a User Song to USB flash memory in SMF format ➔ page 96. 60 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If the memory becomes full during recording a warning message will appear and recording will stop automatically. Use the song clear or track clear (page 61) function to delete unwanted data and make more room available for recording, then do the recording again. Record Your Own Performance ● Data that cannot be recorded • Split voice • The following items are recorded at the beginning of the track. Changes made during the song will not be recorded. Reverb type, Chorus type, Time signature, Style number, Style volume, Tempo (When the style track is recorded) Song Clear—Deleting User Songs This function clears an entire user song (all tracks). 1 2 NOTE From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. • If you only want to clear a specific track from a user song use the Track Clear function. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY [1] button for longer than a second while holding the SONG MEMORY [A] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. Press and hold Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the song. A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. NOTE • To execute the Song Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Song Clear operation. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the song is being cleared. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 61 Record Your Own Performance Track Clear—Deleting a Specified Track from a User Song This function lets you delete a specified track from a user song. 1 2 From the MAIN display select the user song (031–035) you want to clear. Press and hold the SONG MEMORY track button ([1]–[5], [A]) corresponding to the track you want to clear for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the [+] button. 4 Press the [+] button to clear the track. 62 A confirmation message will appear on the display. You can cancel the clear operation by pressing the [-] button. The clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display while the track is being cleared. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual NOTE • To execute the Track Clear function press the [+] button. Press [-] to cancel the Track Clear operation. Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation as explained below. ● The Backup Parameters • User Songs • Style Files • Registration Memory • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Cancel, Language Selection, Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fingering Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. ■Backup Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory—panel user setting, registration memory, user songs, style file—turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. ■Flash Clear ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To clear song, style and music database files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [STANDBY/ON] switch while simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest black keys. CAUTION • When you execute the Flash Clear operation, data you have purchased will also be cleared. Be sure to save data you want to keep to a computer. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 63 Basic Operation Basic Operation Overall DGX-530/YPG-535 control is based on the following simple operations. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. 2 Use the dial to select an item or value. 3 Start a function. 3 Start a function. 1 Select a basic function. 2 Select an item or value. Display (pages 66, 67) ● Volume Adjustment Adjusts the volume of the sound heard via the instrument’s speakers or a pair of headphones plugged into the PHONES jack. Rotate counterclockwise to lower the volume. Rotate clockwise to increase the volume. 1 Press a button to select a basic function. Select a song you want to listen to or a song you want to use for a lesson. Select an auto-accompaniment style. Select a voice you want to play on the keyboard. 64 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation 2 Use the dial to select an item or value When you select a basic function, the item corresponding to that function will be listed in the display. You can then use the dial or the number buttons [0]–[9] to select the desired item. The currently selected item is highlighted in the display. In this example the [VOICE] button has been pressed. ■Changing Values ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● r Jump to the first item in the next or previous category. r Increase f Decrease The CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons are useful for selecting categorized items, as in the example below. Example: VOICE SELECT Display r ] mark. f CATEGORY button [ CATEGORY button [ Press briefly to decrement. Press briefly to increment. Select the category shown here. The first voice in the selected category is selected. In a display in which a category appears, selection is easy if you first use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the category containing the desired item, then use the dial or [+] and [-] buttons to select the item. This can be particularly handy when you have to select from a large number of voices. f ● Number Buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a song number or parameter value. Hundreds or tens digits that are “0” can be omitted (see below). Example: Song number “003” can be entered in three ways. • [0] → [0] → [3] • [0] → [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) • [3] (“003” will appear on the display after a brief delay) Press number buttons [0], [0], [3]. ] mark. r ● [+] and [-] Buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increment the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrement the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increment or decrement the value in the corresponding direction. ● CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons When selecting a song, style, or voice, you can use these buttons to jump to the first item in the next or previous category. f ● Dial Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value of the selected item, or counterclockwise to decrease it’s value. Rotate the dial continuously to continuously increase or decrease the value. In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. 3 Start a function. This is the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/STOP] button after pressing the [SONG] or [STYLE] button to start playback of the selected song or style (rhythm). DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 65 Basic Operation The Displays ● Display Names All operations are carried out while watching the display. A number of display types are provided for different modes and functions. The name of the current display appears at the top of the display. ● MAIN Display Title To Return To the MAIN Display Most basic operations are carried out from the instrument’s MAIN display. You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] button near the lower right corner of the display panel. r f ● FUNCTION Display (page 89) The FUNCTION display provides access to 46 utility functions. The FUNCTION display appears when the [FUNCTION] button is pressed. In the FUNCTION display you can use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons (page 65) to select 46 different groups of functions. Press the CATEGORY button(s) as many times as necessary until the required function appears. You can then use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the number [0]–[9] buttons to adjust the value of the function as required. Function item Value The “Press & Hold” Symbol The “ ” symbol that appears next to some buttons indicates that the button can be pressed and held for longer than a second to call up a related function. This provides convenient direct access to a range of functions. 66 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Basic Operation MAIN Display Items The MAIN display shows all of the current basic settings: song, style, voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status of a range of functions. * Adjust the LCD CONTRAST control on the rear panel of the instrument for optimum display legibility. A-B Repeat Tempo Appears when repeat playback is engaged. Transpose Measure Number Function ON/Off Icons Dual Appears when the Dual Voice is on. When this icon is showing a second voice is “layered” on and played with the main voice. Chord Display Split Style (Auto-accompaniment) Status (page 26) Registration Memory Status (page 87) Appears when the Split Voice is on. When this icon is showing different voices can be played to the left and right of the keyboard split point. Performance assistant technology Appears when the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button is pressed to turn accompaniment on after selecting a style. When showing the keyboard range to the left of the split point is used for accompaniment chord recognition. Shows the selected bank number. Shows the memory numbers that contain data. A border appears around the selected number. Appears when the synchro-stop function is engaged. The style pattern name. Song Track Status (pages 58, 86) Appears when the performance assistant technology is on. Harmony Appears when Harmony is on. When this icon is showing harmony notes will be added to the main voice. File Control When this icon is showing you can control file operations. Highlighted during user song recording. The track(s) selected for recording are highlighted during user-song recording. Only tracks that contain data are displayed. A border appears around a selected track that contains data. No border appears around a Muted track. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 67 Reference e erenc ef R Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes to the main voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony feature on. To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button again. Hold for longer than a second. The currently selected harmony type When harmony is on the harmony icon will appear in the display. NOTE • When you press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate harmony type for the currently selected main voice is automatically selected. 3 Use the dial to select a harmony type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 133 for information about the available harmony types. Try playing the keyboard with the harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different-refer to the below section “How to sound each Harmony Type” as well as the Effect Type List for details. 2 Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second. The currently selected harmony type will be displayed. NOTE • The harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no harmony notes when the auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). ● How to sound each Harmony Type • Harmony type 13 to 19 (Tremolo) • Harmony type 01 to 05 Keep holding down the keys. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 26). • Harmony type 06 to 12 (Trill) Keep holding down the keys. Hold down two keys. 68 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual • Harmony type 20 to 26 (Echo) You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 91). Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Reverb Reverb lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. When you select a style or song the optimum reverb type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different reverb type, use the procedure described below. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 133 for information about the available reverb types. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to select a reverb type. You can check how the selected reverb type sounds by playing on the keyboard. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Reverb Type item. Selected reverb type. Refer to the Effect Type List on page 133 for information about the available reverb types. Reverb Type item ● Adjusting the Reverb Level You can individually adjust the amount of reverb that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 90). DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 69 Play with a Variety of Effects Adding Chorus The chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same voices being played in unison. When you select a style or song the optimum chorus type for the voice used is automatically selected. If you want to select a different chorus type, use the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Use the dial to select a chorus type. You can check how the selected chorus type sounds by playing on the keyboard. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Chorus Type item. Selected chorus type. Chorus Type item ● Adjusting the Chorus Level You can individually adjust the amount of chorus that is applied to the main, dual, and split voices. (See page 90). 70 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Play with a Variety of Effects Panel Sustain This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect split voice. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 3 You can then use the [+] and [-] buttons to turn panel sustain on or off. NOTE • The sustain of some voices may not be markedly affected when the panel sustain function is turned on. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Sustain item. The current setting is displayed. Pitch Bend The pitch bend wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. If you use this feature with a voice such as the “045 Overdriven” guitar voice (page 17), you can produce remarkably realistic string-bending effects. You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel, as described on page 90. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 71 e erenc ef R Handy Performance Features Tap Start You can start the song/style by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—4 times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3. You can change the tempo during song playback by pressing the button just twice. Touch Response Sensitivity You can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 3 Use the dial to select a touch sensitivity setting between 1 and 3. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics —i.e. greater sensitivity. A setting of “4” results in a fixed touch response, or no level change no matter how hard or how soft you play the keys. NOTE • The initial default touch sensitivity setting is “2”. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Touch Sensitivity item. The currently selected touch sensitivity will be displayed. Touch Sensitivity item 72 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features One Touch Setting Sometimes selecting the ideal voice to play with a song or style can be confusing. The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects a well-balanced voice for you when you select a style or song. Simply select voice number “000” to activate this feature. 1 Select voice number “000” (steps 1 to 2 on page 17). 4 Use the dial to change songs, then play the keyboard and listen to the voice. You should hear a different keyboard voice than you played in step 3. Watch the display while changing songs and you will see that different voices are selected for each song. Use the dial to select voice number 000. 2 Select and play back any song (steps 1 to 3 on page 31). 3 Play the keyboard and remember the sound of the voice. If you have stopped playback at some point during this procedure press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 73 Handy Performance Features Select an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems—the instrument’s internal speakers, headphones, or an external speaker system. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. The currently selected function will appear in the display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary to select the master EQ type function “Master EQ Type”. The currently selected EQ type will appear. The currently selected master EQ type. 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ setting. Five settings are available: 1–5. Settings 1 and 2 are best for listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers, setting 3 is for headphones, and settings 4 and 5 are ideal for listening via external speakers. 74 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Pitch Controls ◆ Large Pitch Changes (Transpose) The overall pitch of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. ◆ Small Pitch Changes (Tuning) The overall tuning of the instrument can by shifted up or down by a maximum of 100 cents in 1-cent increments (100 cents = 1 semitone). 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 2 Use the CATEGORY [ Transpose item Tuning item Can be set between -12 and +12 3 Use the dial to set the transpose value between -12 and +12 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Tuning item. f r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Transpose item. Can be set between -100 and +100 3 Use the dial to set the tuning value between -100 and +100 as required. NOTE • The pitch of Drum Kits voices cannot be changed. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 75 e erenc ef R Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Basic operation of the Style (auto-accompaniment) feature is described on page 25 of the Quick Guide. Here are some other ways you can play the styles, the style volume adjustment procedure, how you can play chords using the styles, and more. Pattern Variation (Sections) The DGX-530/YPG-535 features a wide variety of style “sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the song you are playing. Intro Ending Main A/B Auto fill ● INTRO section This is used for the beginning of the Song. When the intro finishes playing, accompaniment shifts to the main section. The length of the intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. ● MAIN section This is used for playing the main part of the Song. It plays a main accompaniment pattern, and repeats indefinitely until another section’s button is pressed. There are two variations on the basic pattern (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically based on the chords you play with your left hand. ● Fill-in section This is automatically added before changing to section A or B. ● ENDING section This is used for the ending of the Song. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. The length of the ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. 76 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 1 Press the [STYLE] button and then select a style. 4 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. The name of the selected section—MAIN A or MAIN B—will be displayed. 5 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Appears when auto accompaniment is on. You’re now ready to play the intro. 6 As soon as you play a chord with your 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn synchro start on. The indicator will flash when the synchro start standby mode will be engaged. left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Playing Auto-accompaniment Chords” on page 30. Split point Accompaniment range ● Synchro Start When the synchro start standby mode is engaged, style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. You can disengage the synchro-start standby mode by pressing the [SYNC START] button again. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 77 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions 7 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. When the fill-in is finished, it leads smoothly into the selected main section A/B. 8 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. The style will play while you are playing the keys This switches to the ending section. When the ending is finished, the auto accompaniment stops automatically. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. ● Synchro Stop When this function is selected the accompaniment style will only play while you are playing chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard. Style playback will stop when you release the keys. To turn the function on, press the [SYNC STOP] button. 78 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Style playback will stop when you release the keys Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Setting the Split Point The initial default split point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key using the procedure described below. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the split point to any key from 000 (C-2) through 127 (G8). Split point (54 : F#2) Main voice Split voice NOTE • The split point cannot be changed during a song lesson. • The split voice sounds when the split-point key is played. NOTE • You can also access the Split Point item by pressing the [FUNCTION] button and using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the item (page 89). r r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Split point item. f 2 Use the CATEGORY [ • When you change the split point the auto-accompaniment split point also changes. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 79 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Play a Style with Chords but No Rhythm (Stop Accompaniment) When auto accompaniment is on (the ACMP ON icon is showing) and Synchro Start is off, you can play chords in the left-hand accompaniment range of the keyboard while the style is stopped and still hear the accompaniment chords. This is “Stop Accompaniment”, and any of the chord fingerings recognized by the instrument can be used (page 30). Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on after pressing the [STYLE] button. Accompaniment range Appears when auto accompaniment is on Adjusting the Style Volume 2 Use the CATEGORY [ r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Style Volume item. f Press the [STYLE] button to engage the style function. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the dial to set the style volume between 000 and 127. 80 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Chord Basics Two or more notes played together constitute a “chord”. The most basic chord type is the “triad” consisting of three notes: the root, third, and fifth degrees of the corresponding scale. A C major triad, for example, is made up of the notes C (the root), E (the third note of the C major scale), and G (the fifth note of the C major scale). 3rd 3rd Root In the C major triad shown above, the lowest note is the “root” of the chord (this is the chord’s “root position” ... using other chord notes for the lowest note results in “inversions”). The root is the central sound of the chord, which supports and anchors the other chord notes. The distance (interval) between adjacent notes of a triad in root position is either a major or minor third. Major third–four half steps (semitones) Minor third–three half steps (semitones) The lowest interval in our root-position triad (between the root and the third) determines whether the triad is a major or minor chord, and we can shift the highest note up or down by a semitone to produce two additional chords, as shown below. Major chord CM Minor 3rd Minor chord Cm Major 3rd Augmented chord C aug Minor 3rd Major 3rd Diminished chord C dim Major 3rd Major 3rd Minor 3rd Minor 3rd The basic characteristics of the chord sound remain intact even if we change the order of the notes to create different inversions. Successive chords in a chord progression can be smoothly connected, for example, by choosing the appropriate inversions (or chord “voicings”). ● Reading Chord Names Chord names tell you just about everything you need to know about a chord (other than the inversion/voicing). The chord name tells you what the root of the chord is, whether it is a major, minor, or diminished chord, whether it requires a major or flatted seventh, what alterations or tensions it uses ... all at a glance. Cm Root note Chord type ● Some Chord Types (These are just some of the “Standard” chord types recognized by the DGX-530/YPG-535.) Suspended 4 th 7 th C sus4 Perfect 5 th Perfect 4 th Minor/major 7 th Flatted 7 th Minor chord Major chord Flatted 7 th C M7 Minor chord Minor 7 th, flatted 5 th 7 th chord Flatted 5 th Major chord C 7sus4 C m7 C7 Major 7 th 7 th, suspended 4 th (b5) (b5) Flatted 5 th Major 7 th C m7 7 th, flatted 5 th C mM7 Major 7 th Minor 7 th C7 Minor 7 th chord Flatted 7 th Suspended 4 th chord DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 81 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions ■Recognized Standard Chords ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All chords in the chart are “C-root” chords. Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing Chord (C) Major [M] 1-3-5 C Add ninth [(9)] 1-2-3-5 C Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6 C6 Display C (9) C9 C6 (9) C6 C 69 * C M7 CM7 Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - 7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7 1 - 3 - b5 Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7 Suspended fourth [sus4] Sixth ninth [6(9)] Major seventh [M7] (9) C M79 * (#11) CM7#11 * (b5) Cb5 * C M7 (b5) CM7b5 * 1-4-5 C sus4 Csus4 Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5 C aug Caug Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7 C M7aug CM7aug * Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5 Cm Cm9 Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6 C m6 Cm6 Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7 C m7 Cm7 Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7 C M7 C M7 C (9) (9) C m7 Cm79 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7) C m7 Cm711 * Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 CmM7 Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7 C mM7 Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7 C m7 Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7 Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5 Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or 1 - (3) - 5 - b7 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7 Seventh [7] Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] Seventh ninth [7(9)] Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or 1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7 (11) (9) (b5) CmM79 * Cm7b5 C mM7 C dim CmM7b5 * C dim7 Cdim7 C7 C7 (b5) Cdim (b9) C7b9 (b13) C7b13 (9) C79 (#11) C7#11 (13) C713 (#9) C7 C7 C7 C7 C7 Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7 C7 C7#9 Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7 C 7b5 C7b5 * Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7 C 7aug C7aug Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7 C 7sus4 C7sus4 Suspended second [sus2] 1-2-5 C sus2 Csus2 * * These chords are not shown in the Dictionary function. NOTE • Notes in parentheses can be omitted. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. • A perfect fifth (1 + 5) produces accompaniment based only on the root and fifth which can be used with both major and minor chords. • The chord fingerings listed are all in “root” position, but other inversions can be used—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2. 82 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes shown in parentheses are omitted. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Style File This instrument features 160 internal styles, but other styles, such as those provided on the CD-ROM and others that can be obtained from the internet (only styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be loaded into style number 161 and used in the same way as the internal styles. For details on loading the style file, see “Loading User Files and Style Files” on page 97. In order to load a style file it is necessary to first either transfer the style file to the instrument from a computer, or connect a USB flash memory containing the style file to the USB TO DEVICE connector. Refer to “Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer” on page 102 for details on the file transfer procedure. If you use a USB flash memory refer to “Loading User Files and Style Files” on page 97. Playing Styles Using the Entire Keyboard In “Play Along with a Style” on page 26 we described a method of playing styles in which chords were detected only to the left of the keyboard split point. By making the settings described below, however, chord detection for style accompaniment occurs over the entire range of the keyboard, allowing for even more dynamic style performance. In this mode only chords played in the normal way (page 30) can be detected. 1 Press the [CHORD FINGERING] button to select the function “Chord Fingering”. 2 Use the dial to select 2 “FullKeyboard”. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 83 Style (Auto-accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord book” that shows you the individual notes of chords. It is ideal when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the LESSON [START] button for longer than a second. Hold for longer than a second 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Notation of chord Chord name (root and type) 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT”. (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. • Be aware that the chord types explained here are the left-hand notes applied to various styles and different from the one for the performance assistant technology feature. 4 Try playing a chord in the auto accom- paniment section of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flash. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 84 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R Song Settings Song Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Song volume item Can be set between 000 and 127 2 Use the CATEGORY [ f r ] and [ ] buttons to select the Song Volume item. 3 Use the dial to set the song volume between 000 and 127. NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a song is selected. A-B Repeat You can specify a section of a song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A 2 Press the [A-B REPEAT] button a sec- ond time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). B 1 Play the song (page 31) and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point). 3 The specified A-B section of the song will now play repeatedly. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • The current measure number is shown in the display during playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the song. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 85 Song Settings Muting Independent Song Parts Each “track” of a song plays a different part of the song—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. You can mute individual tracks and play the muted part on the keyboard yourself, or simply mute tracks other than the ones you want to listen to. Use the SONG MEMORY [1]–[5] and [A] buttons to mute or un-mute the corresponding tracks. The border around the track number in the display disappears when that track is muted. Refer to page 58 for information about the song track configuration. No track number ... no data. Track number without border ... track contains data but is muted. Track number with border ... track contains data and is not muted. Change the Melody Voice You can change a song’s melody voice to any other voice you prefer. NOTE • You cannot change the melody voice of a user song. Press the lesson [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously so that “LR” appears in the upper right corner of the MAIN display. Select the song and play it. 1 Press the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. The VOICE SELECT (MELODY R or MELODY L) display will appear so you can select the Melody R or Melody L voice. Pressing the [VOICE] button alternates between VOICE SELECT MELODY R and MELODY L. Hold for longer than a second 86 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 2 Use the dial to select the voice. As you select different melody voices, only the melody voice changes while the song will remain the same. e erenc ef R Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you save your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 16 complete setups can be saved (8 banks of two setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Up to 16 presets (eight banks of two each) can be memorized. Saving to the Registration Memory 1 Set the panel controls as required— select a voice, accompaniment style, etc. 2 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] or [2] button while holding the [MEMORY/ BANK] button to store the current panel settings to the specified registration memory. bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display in order to check the bank and registration memory numbers. Bank number 3 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number but- tons to select a bank number from 1 to 8. Bank number NOTE • You can also save your panel settings memorized to registration memory button into USB flash memory as the user file or to a computer as the backup file. NOTE NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the registration memory during song playback. • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. CAUTION • Do not turn off the power while saving settings to the registration memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 87 Memorize Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling a Registration Memory 1 Press the [MEMORY/BANK] button. A bank number will appear in the display when you release the button. ● Settings That Can be Saved to the Registration Memory • Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering Bank number 2 Use the dial or the [1]–[8] number buttons to select bank you want to recall. • Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level), Dual Voice settings (Dual ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level), Split Voice settings (Split ON/OFF, Voice number, Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level) • Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain ON/OFF • Harmony settings Harmony ON/OFF, Harmony Type, Harmony Volume • Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song features. You can check whether the panel settings are stored in registration memory 1 or 2 by pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY button, [1] or [2], containing the settings you want to recall. The panel controls will be instantly set accordingly. 88 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual e erenc ef R The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters for tuning, setting the split point, and adjusting the voices and effects. Take a look at the function list starting on the opposite page. There are 46 function parameters in all. When you locate a function you want to set up, simply select the function’s display name (shown to the right of the function name in the list) and adjust as required. Selecting and Setting Functions 1 Find the function you want to set in the list that begins on page 90. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the selected function as required. The [+] and [-] buttons are used to make ON/ OFF type settings: [+] = ON, [-] = OFF. In some cases the [+] button will initiate execution of the selected function, and the [-] will cancel the selection. Direct numeric entry. 3 Select a function. Function category Previous item r f Press the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons as many times as necessary until the function’s display name appears in the display. • Decrement value by 1. • OFF • Cancel • Increment value by 1. • ON • Execute Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. Next item The selected function Value Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 63 for information on the function settings that are stored on the instrument. To restore all initial factor default settings perform the “Backup Clear” procedure described in the “Initialization” section on page 63. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 89 The Functions ● Function Setting List Category VOLUME Function Item Range/Settings Style Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Style. Song Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Song. Transpose -12–+12 Determines the pitch of the instrument by semitone increments. Tuning -100–+100 Sets the pitch of the instrument’s sound in 1-cent increments. Pitch Bend Range 01–12 Sets the pitch bend range in semitone increments. Split Point 000–127(C-2–G8) Determines the highest key for the Split voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. Touch Sensitivity 1(Soft), 2(Medium), 3(Hard), 4 (Off) Determines the sensitivity of the feature. Chord Fingering 1(Multi Finger), 2(FullKeyboard) Sets the chord detection mode. In the Multi Finger mode both normal chords and simple chords played to the left of the split point are detected. In the Full Keyboard mode normal chords played anywhere on the keyboard will be detected, and the notes played will be sound as well. Main Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Main voice. Main Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Main voice. Main Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Main voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Dual voice. Dual Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. Dual Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Dual voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Dual voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Split voice. Split Octave -2–+2 Determines the octave range for the Split voice. Split Pan 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) Determines the pan position of the Split voice in the stereo image. The value “0” results in the sound being panned full left; the value “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Reverb Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Chorus Level 000–127 Determines how much of the Split voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Reverb Type 01–10 Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). (See the list on page 133) Chorus Type 1–5 Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). (See the list on page 133) Sustain ON/OFF Determines whether or not panel sustain is always applied to the MAIN/ DUAL voices. Panel sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. (page 71) Master EQ Type 1(Speaker 1), 2(Speaker 2), 3(Headphones), 4(Line Out 1), 5(Line Out 2) Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. OVERALL MAIN VOICE DUAL VOICE SPLIT VOICE EFFECT 90 Description DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual The Functions Category Function Item Range/Settings Description Harmony Type 01–26 Determines the Harmony type. (See the list on page 133) Harmony Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. PAT P.A.T. Type CHORD, CHORD/FREE, MELODY, CHORD/MELODY Determines the performance assistant technology feature type. (See the list on page 37) PC PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 102). Local ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). (page 102) External Clock ON/OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). (page 102) Keyboard Out ON/OFF Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF Determines whether User Song is transmitted (ON) via USB or not (OFF) during Song playback. Initial Setup YES/NO Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel. Time Signature Numerator 00–60 Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator 2, 4, 8, 16 Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome Volume 000–127 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Quantize 1(1/4 note), 2(1/4 note triplet), 3(1/8 note), 4(1/8 note triplet), 5(1/16 note), 6(1/16 note triplet), 7(1/32 note), 8(1/32 note triplet) Depending on the song data, you can make the score more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the song, you should set this value to “eighth note”. Any notes or rests shorter than this value will not be shown in the score. Right-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Left-Part GuideTrack 1–16 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Grade ON/OFF Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Demo Cancel ON/OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO] button is pressed. English/Japanese Determines the display language for the demo displays, song file names, lyrics and certain display messages. All other messages and names are displayed in English. When this is set to Japanese, the file names are displayed in the Japanese font. The lyrics display follows the language setting originally made in the song data; however, when no such setting exists, the setting here is used. HARMONY MIDI METRONOME SCORE LESSON UTILITY LANGUAGE Language * All these settings can be conveniently reset to their initial default values by pressing the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. (The exception to this is Initial Send, which is an operation, not a setting.) DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 91 e erenc ef R Using USB Flash Memory USB flash memory is a memory medium used for storing data. When a USB flash memory is inserted in this instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, user songs created on the instrument and the registered settings can be saved to or loaded from the memory medium. USB flash memory can also be used to transfer song data downloaded from the Internet to the instrument, where it can be used with the performance assistant technology (page 37) and Lesson (page 48) features described in the Quick Guide. Furthermore, user songs saved to USB flash memory in MIDI file format can also be used with these features. In this section we’ll look at the procedures for setting up and formatting USB flash memory devices, as well as for saving and loading data to and from them. Before using a USB device, read through the “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 93, and the “Using USB Storage Devices” section on page 93. Connecting a USB Flash Memory 1 Connect a USB flash memory to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it with the proper orientation. 2 Check that the file control icon is shown in the MAIN display. Appears while the memory device is being mounted. File Control Icon A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 116 for an explanation of each message. You can go to the FILE CONTROL display from which you can access USB flash memory operations by pressing the [MENU] button from this display. (Do not press this button now, but only when instructed to in the sections below.) Menu Reference Page Format 94 Save 95 SMF Save 96 Load 97 Delete 98 NOTE • No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related to file functions will be active. • The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following cases: • During style or song playback. • During a lesson. • While data is being loaded from a USB flash memory. 92 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory ■ Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. ● Compatible USB devices • USB storage devices (flash memory, floppy disk drive) The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: ● Using USB Storage Devices By connecting the instrument to a USB storage device, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected device. NOTE • Although CD-R/RW drives can be used to read data to the instrument, they cannot be used for saving data. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ NOTE • Other USB devices such as a computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. ● Connecting USB device • When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. • Though the instrument supports the USB 1.1 standard, you can connect and use a USB 2.0 storage device with the instrument. However, note that the transfer speed is that of USB 1.1. The number of USB storage device to be used Only one USB storage devices can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Formatting USB storage media When a USB storage device is connected or media is inserted, a message may appear prompting you to format the device/media. If so, execute the Format operation (page 94). CAUTION • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the media you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each storage device or media. If you are saving data to the USB storage device, make sure to disable write-protect. Connecting/removing USB storage device Before removing the media from the device, make sure that the instrument is not accessing data (such as in the Save and Delete operations). CAUTION • Avoid frequently turning the power on/off to the USB storage device, or connecting/disconnecting the device too often. Doing so may result in the operation of the instrument “freezing” or hanging up. While the instrument is accessing data (such as during Save, Delete, Load and Format operations) or is mounting the USB storage device (shortly after the connection), do NOT unplug the USB connector, do NOT remove the media from the device, and do NOT turn the power off to either device. Doing so may corrupt the data on either or both devices. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 93 Using USB Flash Memory Formatting USB Flash Memory New USB flash memory must be formatted before they can be used by this instrument. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or CAUTION • If you format a USB flash memory that already contains data, all of the data will be erased. Be careful not to erase important data when using the format function. the [+] button, and the format operation will begin. CAUTION 1 After connecting the USB flash memory to be formatted to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, check that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 6 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Format item. The display prompts you for confirmation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button and the display prompts you for confirmation. You can press the [-] button at this point to cancel the operation. 94 • Once the format-in-progress message appears on the display the format operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory Saving Data Three types of data are saved to one “User File” by this operation: user song, style file, and registration memory data. When you save a user song the style file and registration memory are also saved automatically. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. Cursor left r f 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the User File Save item. A default file name will automatically be created. Delete character The dial selects characters Cursor right Cursor 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 6. NOTE 7 play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. The user song will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory. • Up to 100 user files can be saved to a single USB flash memory. • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. • If there is not enough capacity left on the USB flash memory to save the data an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to save the data. Erase unwanted files from the USB flash memory to make more memory available (page 98), or use a different USB flash memory. • Refer to the “Messages” list on page 116 for other possible errors that might prevent you from completing the operation. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. 5 Change the file name as necessary. • The [-] button moves the cursor to the left, and the [0] button moves it to the right. • Use the dial to select a character for the current cursor location. • The [+] button deletes the character at the cursor location. CAUTION • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 8 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 95 Using USB Flash Memory Convert a User Song to SMF Format and Save This operation converts a user song (song numbers 031–035) to SMF Format 0 and saves the file to USB flash memory. ● What is SMF (Standard MIDI File)? The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. There are two variations: Format 0 and Format 1. A large number of MIDI devices are compatible with SMF Format 0, and most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. 1 Make sure that a properly formatted USB flash memory has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. ● To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash memory, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 7. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. 7 Change the file name as necessary. Refer to “Saving Data” on page 95 for filename entry. 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the SMF Save item. The SOURCE FILE—a user song name—will be highlighted. Cursor The name of the file to be saved 8 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the save operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 9 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the save operation will begin. The user song will be stored to the USER FILE folder in the USB flash memory. The source user song name. CAUTION 4 Select the source user song. You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to select the first user song. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The DESTINATION SONG will be highlighted, and a default name will appear for the converted song file. • Once the save-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 10 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If an existing filename is specified the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. • The amount of time it will take to perform the save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash memory. 96 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory Loading User Files and Style Files User files, style files, and styles residing on a USB flash memory can be loaded into the instrument. The style file will be loaded into style number 161. If the required style file has already been transferred to the instrument from a computer using the Musicsoft Downloader application, start from step 2, below. Refer to “Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer” on page 102 for details on transferring style files. 4 Use the dial to select the user file or CAUTION • If you load a User File user song (031–035), style file, and registration memory data will be overwritten by the newly loaded data. If you only load a style file, only the style file will be overwritten. Save important data to a USB flash memory before loading data that will overwrite it. style file you want to load. All user files in the USB flash memory will be displayed first, followed by the style files. NOTE 1 With the USB flash memory containing the file you want to load connected to the USB TO DEVICE connector, check that the File Control icon is shown in the MAIN display. • Style files must be located in the root directory. Style files located within folders will not be recognized. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The dis- play prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the load operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] but- the [+] button, and the load operation will begin. ton. r f 3 CAUTION Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate the Load item. • Once the load-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 97 Using USB Flash Memory Deleting Data from a USB Flash Memory This procedure deletes user file and SMF file from a USB flash memory. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory containing the file(s) you want to delete has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 2 Press the FILE CONTROL [MENU] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ r f ] and [ ] buttons to locate the Delete item. 4 Select the file you want to delete. You can press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to select the first song or user file on the USB flash memory. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The display prompts you for confirmation. You can cancel the delete operation at this point by pressing the [-] button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] button, and the delete operation will begin. CAUTION • Once the delete-in-progress message appears on the display the operation cannot be canceled. Never turn off the power or remove the USB flash memory during this operation. 7 A message will appear on the display to inform you that the operation has finished. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. NOTE • If the USB flash memory has been write-protected, an appropriate message will appear on the display and you will not be able to execute the operation. 98 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Using USB Flash Memory Playing Data on a USB Flash Memory IMPORTANT • In order to play data copied to a USB flash memory from a computer or other device, the data must be stored either in the USB flash memory’s root directory or a first-level/second-level folder in the root directory. Data stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. USB flash memory (Root) Song File Song File Can be selected/played. Song File Song File Cannot be selected/played. 1 Make sure that the USB flash memory containing the song or music database you want to play has been properly connected to the instrument’s USB TO DEVICE terminal, and that the icon is showing in the MAIN display. 2 Press the [SONG] button if a song file is 3 to be played, or the [MUSIC DATABASE] button if a Music Database is to be played. Files of the corresponding type will be displayed. Use the dial to select the file you want to play: Song numbers 36 and higher, or Music Database numbers 301 and higher. 4 Play the selected file in the same way the internal files are played: press the [START/STOP] button, or play on the keyboard. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 99 e erenc ef R Connections Connectors q q USB TO DEVICE terminal This terminal allows connection to USB storage devices. Refer to “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” section on page 93. 100 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual w w USB TO HOST terminal This terminal allows direct connection to a personal computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 101 for more information. Connections Connecting a Personal Computer The following functions become available when this instrument is connected to a computer. ● Performance data can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 102). ● Files can be transferred between the instrument and the computer (page 104). The connection procedure is as follows: 1 Install the USB-MIDI driver on your com- puter. The USB-MIDI driver is included on the CD-ROM. Installation of the USB-MIDI driver is described on pages 109–111. 2 Connect the USB terminal of the computer to the USB terminal on the instrument using an AB type USB cable (USB cable sold separately). The supplied CD-ROM also includes a Musicsoft Downloader application that allows you to transfer song files from your computer to the instrument’s flash memory. For instructions about how to install Musicsoft Downloader and how to transfer song files, see pages 104, 111. ■ Precautions when using the USB TO HOST terminal When connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. CAUTION • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. • Before connecting the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspended, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB TO HOST terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB TO HOST terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted whenever you play on the keyboard or play back a song, etc.) • While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. Computer Instrument USB cable DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 101 Connections Transferring Performance Data to and from a Computer By connecting the instrument to a computer, the instrument’s performance data can be used on the computer, and performance data from the computer can be played on the instrument. ● When the instrument is connected with computer, it transmits/receives performance data. USB terminal USB terminal Computer Instrument USB cable ■MIDI settings ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● These settings pertain to performance data transmission and reception. Range/Settings Description Local ON/OFF Local control determines whether or not notes played on the instrument are sounded by its internal tone generator system: the internal tone generator is active when local control is on, and inactive when local control is off. External Clock ON/OFF These settings determine whether the instrument is synchronized to its own internal clock (OFF), or to a clock signal from an external device (ON). Keyboard Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). Style Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether Style data is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Style playback. Song Out ON/OFF These settings determine whether User Song is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) during Song playback. • If you can’t get any sound out of the instrument, this most likely may be caused by Local Control being set to off. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the item you want to change its value. r CAUTION f Item CAUTION • If External Clock is ON and no clock signal is being received from an external device, the song, style, and metronome functions will not start. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 102 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the dial to select ON or OFF. Connections ■PC Mode ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● A number of MIDI settings need to be made when you want to transfer performance data between the computer and the instrument. The PC Mode item can conveniently make multiple settings for you in one operation. Three settings are available: PC1, PC2, and OFF. This setting is not necessary when transferring song or backup files between the computer and the instrument. 1 Press and hold the [DEMO] button for longer than a second so that the PC Mode item appears. * Set the PC mode to PC2 when using Digital Music Notebook. PC1 PC2* OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON Local 2 Use the dial to select PC1, PC2, or OFF. NOTE • When the PC2 setting is selected the instrument’s style, song, demo, song recording, and lesson features cannot be used. NOTE r f • You can also access the PC Mode item by first pressing the [FUNCTION] button and then using the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to locate it (page 89). Remote Control of MIDI Devices You can also use this instrument as a remote control device for the Digital Music Notebook application on your computer (via the USB connection)—controlling playback, stop and transport functions from the panel. ■Remote control keys ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● To use the remote control functions, simultaneously hold down the lowest two keys on the keyboard (A-1 and A#-1) and press the appropriate key (shown below). NOTE • Remote control of MIDI devices will function independently of the PC2 mode. A#-1 A-1 C7: Fast forward B6: Start A6: Stop G6: Rewind F6: Top (move to the beginning of the song) E6: Metronome ON/OFF DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 103 Connections Initial Send This function lets you send the panel setup data to a computer. Before you record performance data to a sequencer application running on your computer, it is a good idea to first send and record the panel setup data before the actual performance data. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [ 3 Press [+/YES] to send, or press [-/NO] to cancel. r f ] and [ ] buttons to select the Initial Send item. Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument MIDI songs, styles, or Music Database files residing on a computer or the supplied CD-ROM can be transferred to the instrument. Backup file can also be transferred from the instrument to the computer and back. In order to transfer files between your computer and the instrument you will need to install the Musicsoft Downloader application and the USBMIDI Driver included on the Accessory CD-ROM on your computer. Refer to the Accessory CDROM Installation Guide on page 107 for installation details. ● Data that can be transferred from a computer to this instrument. • Data Capacity: 875KB 512 files total for the Song, Style and Music Database. • Data Format Song: .mid SMF format 0/1 Style: .sty Music Database: .mfd Backup File: 08PG88.BUP 104 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual ■With the Musicsoft Downloader You Can. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Transfer files from the computer to the instrument’s flash memory. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 105. The procedure for transferring songs included on the Accessory CD-ROM from your computer to the instrument is given as an example. ● Backup file can be transferred from the instrument to a computer and back. ⇒ refer to the procedure described on page 106. Use the Musicsoft Downloader application with Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. Connections ■Use Musicsoft Downloader To Transfer Songs From the Accessory CD-ROM To the Instrument’s flash memory ● ● ● ● ● NOTE • If a song or style is being played, stop playback before proceeding. 1 Install the Musicsoft Downloader and USB-MIDI driver to your computer, then connect the computer and the instrument (page 109). At this point you can select a Style or Music Database file on the computer or CD-ROM and transfer it to the instrument in the same way as a song file. 6 A copy of the selected MIDI song file will appear in the “List of files stored temporarily” at the top of the window. The memory medium will also be displayed at the bottom of the window to specify the destination for the transfer. Click “Instrument”, and then “Flash memory”. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. 3 Double-click the Musicsoft Downloader shortcut icon that is created on the desktop. This will launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and the main window will appear. NOTE • The instrument cannot be operated while the Musicsoft Downloader is running. 4 Click the “Add File” button and the Add File window will appear. 5 Click the button to the right of “Look in” and select the CD-ROM drive from the drop-down menu that appears. Doubleclick the “SampleData” Folder on the window. Select the file from the “SongData” Folder you want to transfer to the instrument, and click “Open”. q Click the CD-ROM drive q Click “Electronic Musical Instruments”, and then “Flash Memory” 7 After selecting the file in the “List of files stored temporarily”, click the downward [Move] button and a confirmation message will appear. Click [OK] and the song will be transferred from the “List of files stored temporarily” to the instrument’s memory. NOTE • Files transferred to a USB flash memory root directory or the instrument’s flash memory using the Musicsoft Downloader—any location outside the USER FILES folder on the USB flash memory device— cannot be deleted via the instrument’s file control display. Use the Musicsoft Downloader delete button to delete such files. w Double-click “SampleData” Folder → “SongData” Folder, and click a song file. e Click “Open” DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 105 Connections 8 Close the window to end the Musicsoft Downloader. NOTE • End the Musicsoft Downloader to playback the file transferred from your computer. 9 To playback a song stored in flash memory, press the [SONG] button. Use the dial to select the song you want to play, then press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. CAUTION • Do not unplug the USB cable during a data transfer. Not only will the data not be transferred and saved, but operation of the memory media may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. CAUTION • Store data can be lost due to equipment malfunction or improper operation. For safety we recommend that you keep a copy of all important data stored on your computer. ■Transfer a Backup file from the instrument to a computer ● ● ● You can use the Musicsoft Downloader to transfer “Backup file” containing backup data (page 63), including the five User Songs stored on the instrument, to a computer. If you click “Electronic Musical Instruments” in the Musicsoft Downloader display, and then “System Drive”, a file named “08PG88.BUP” will appear in the lower right corner of the Musicsoft Downloader display. This is the backup file. For details about how to transfer backup files using the Musicsoft Downloader application, refer to the Online help “Transferring Data Between the Computer and Instrument (for unprotected data)” in the application. NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument. CAUTION ● To Use transferred Songs For Lessons... In order to use songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. r f 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the song (036–) residing in flash memory for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the R-Part or L-Part item. 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. 106 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual • The backup data, including the five User Songs’ is transmitted/ received as a single file. As a result, all backup data will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. CAUTION • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. e erenc ef R Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide SPECIAL NOTICES • The software and this manual are the exclusive copyrights of Yamaha Corporation. • Use of the software and this manual is governed by the license agreement which the purchaser fully agrees to upon breaking the seal of the software packaging. (Please read carefully the Software Licensing Agreement at the end of this manual before installing the application.) • Copying of the software or reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is expressly forbidden without the written consent of the manufacturer. • Yamaha makes no representations or warranties with regard to the use of the software and documentation and cannot be held responsible for the results of the use of this manual and the software. • This disk containing the software is not meant for use with an audio/visual system (CD player, DVD player, etc.). Do not attempt to use the disk on equipment other than a computer. • Future upgrades of application and system software and any changes in specifications and functions will be announced separately. • The screen displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your computer. Important Notices about the CD-ROM ● Data Types This CD-ROM includes application software. Please refer to page 109 for software installation instructions. CAUTION • Do not attempt to play this CD-ROM on any playback device other than a computer. The resulting high-volume noise may cause hearing damage or damage to the playback device. ● Operating System (OS) The applications in this CD-ROM are provided in versions for Windows operating systems. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 107 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide CD-ROM Contents e r Folder Name q w Application / Data Name Contents Musicsoft Downloader This application can be used to download MIDI song data from the Internet and transfer it from the computer to the instrument’s memory. DMN_ Digital Music Notebook Digital Music Notebook is a combination music learning program and online service that makes it easy and fun to practice and master your favorite songs. You can use the convenient and powerful Digital Music Notebook functions with the demo song after installing Digital Music Notebook. DMN_FlashDemo Digital Music Notebook Flash Demo Full motion demo software which introduces all features of the Digital Music Notebook. Song Book Includes score data for the 30 internal songs provided on the instrument as well as 70 MIDI songs provided on the CD-ROM. The exceptions are songs 1–11, 16, 20 and song 30 which is copyrighted. The scores for songs 9–11 are provided in this manual beginning on page 118. q MSD_ w e SongBook USBdrv2k_ USB-MIDI Driver (Windows 2000/XP) USBdrvVista_ USB-MIDI Driver (Windows Vista/XP x64) r SampleData SongData MIDI 70 songs StyleData 5 style files MDB 5 music database files This driver software is necessary to connect MIDI devices to your computer via USB. These songs, styles, or music database can be transferred to the instrument and played or used with the instrument functions. In order to view PDF scores, you will need to install Adobe Reader in your computer. You can download the Adobe Reader. Please check the following URL: http://www.adobe.com/ ■Using the CD-ROM ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Please read the Software License Agreement on page 137 before opening the CD-ROM package. 1 Check the system requirements to make sure that the software will run on your computer. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. The start window should appear automatically. 3 Install the USB-MIDI driver to the com- puter. Refer to “Installing the USB-MIDI Driver” on page 109 for installation and setup instructions. 108 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 4 Connect the instrument to the com- puter. The connection procedure is described on page 101. 5 Install the software. Musicsoft Downloader: See page 111. 6 Launch the software. For further software operation refer to the online help supplied with the software. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” on page 112 when you have trouble with installing the driver. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide System Requirements Application/Data OS CPU Memory Hard Disk Display Musicsoft Downloader Windows 2000/ XP Home Edition/ XP Professional/Vista *Only 32-bit is supported. 233 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family (500 MHz or higher is recommended) 64 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) at least 128 MB of free space (at least 512 MB of free space is recommended) 800 x 600 HighColor (16-bit) USB Driver for Windows 2000/XP Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional 166 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® processor family 32 MB or more (64 MB or more is recommended) at least 3 MB of free space — USB Driver for Windows Vista/XP x64 Windows Vista/XP Professional x64 Edition 800 MHz or higher; Intel® Pentium® /Celeron® processor family or Intel® 64 compatible processor 512 MB or more at least 3 MB of free space — Digital Music Notebook Windows XP Home/ Professional Edition, Service Pack 1a (SP1a) more/Windows Vista *Only 32-bit is supported. 400 MHz or higher processor clock speed (Intel® Pentium® / Celeron® Processor family, or compatible processor recommended) 128 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended) at least 150 MB of free space 1024 x 768 HighColor (16-bit) Windows 2000/XP Home Edition/XP Professional/ Vista *Only 32-bit is supported. 1 GHz or higher; Intel® Pentium®/Celeron® Processor family (1.4 GHz or more is recommended) 256 MB or more Digital Music Notebook (Requirements for playing content with video included.) Software Installation ● Uninstall (Removing the Software) Installed software can be removed from your computer as follows: From the Windows Start menu select Start → Settings → Control panel → Add or Remove Applications → Install and Uninstall. Select the item you want to remove and click [Add or Remove]. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the selected software. NOTE • The actual names of the menu items and buttons will depend on the OS version you are using. ■ Installing the USB-MIDI Driver● ● ● ● In order to be able to communicate with and use MIDI devices connected to your computer, the appropriate driver software must be properly installed on your computer. The USB-MIDI driver allows sequence software and similar applications on your computer to transmit and receive MIDI data to and from MIDI devices via a USB cable. Computer Sequence software USB Cable MIDI device Driver • Windows 2000 installation ➔ page 110. • Windows XP installation ➔ page 110. • Windows Vista installation ➔ page 111. Check the drive name of the CD-ROM drive you will be using (D:, E:, Q: etc.) The drive name is displayed beside the CD-ROM icon in your “My Computer” folder. The root directory of the CDROM drive will be D:\ , E:\ , or Q:\ , respectively. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 109 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide Installing the driver in Windows 2000 Installing the driver in Windows XP 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis- 2 2 3 4 5 6 trator” account to log on to Windows 2000. Select [My Computer] ➔ [Control Panel] ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing] ➔ [File Signature Verification], and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore—Install all files, regardless of file signature” and click [OK]. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the Found New Hardware Wizard. Click [Next]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. Select the radio button for “Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]”, then click [Next]. Check the “CD-ROM drives” check box, deselect all other check boxes, then click [Next]. 3 4 5 6 NOTE • If the system prompts you to insert the Windows CD-ROM during detection of the drivers, point to the “USBdrv2k_” folder (e.g., D:\USBdrv2k_) and continue the installation. 7 Deselect the “Install one of the other drivers”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If the Wizard panel informs you that “The software you are about to install does not contain a Microsoft digital signature”, click [Yes]. 8 When the installation is complete, the 9 Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) Restart the computer. The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 7 trator” account to log on to Windows XP. Select [Start] ➔ [Control Panel]. If the control panel appears as “Pick a category”, click “Switch to Classic View” in the upper left of the window. All control panels and icons will be displayed. Go to [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Driver Signing Options] and check the radio button to the left of “Ignore” and click [OK]. Click the [OK] button to close System Properties, and then click “X” in the upper right of the window to close the Control Panel. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system launches the Found New Hardware Wizard automatically. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) If the Wizard window prompts you to specify whether or not to connect to Windows Update, select the radio button for “No, not this time”, then click [Next]. Select the radio button for “Install the software automatically (recommended)”, then click [Next]. NOTE • If during the installation the system displays “...has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows XP”, click [Continue Anyway]. 8 When the installation is complete, the Wizard displays “Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard”. Click [Finish]. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) 9 Restart the computer. If the system displays “Found New Hardware” in the lower right corner, wait until the Wizard window is displayed. (Some computers may take a while to display the Wizard window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. 110 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • This Wizard window will not appear when using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition. There is no need to restart the computer. 10 When using Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, the Support Module must be installed. After installing the USB-MIDI drivers for all the connected USB devices, select “My Computer” from the Start menu. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Select “USBdrvVista_” → “XPx64SupportModule” → “Setup.exe” and launch “Setup.exe.” Follow the onscreen directions. NOTE • Once the Support Module is installed, this step is not necessary, even if you’ve connected a new USB device or updated the USBMIDI driver. Installing the driver in Windows Vista 1 Start the computer and use the “Adminis2 3 trator” account to log on to Windows Vista. Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. A start window will appear automatically. First, make sure the POWER switch on the MIDI device is set to OFF, then use a USB cable to connect the MIDI device to the computer. After making the connections, turn on the power of the MIDI device. The system automatically launches the “Found New Hardware” window. Click “Locate and install driver software (recommended)”. Otherwise, refer to “Troubleshooting” in the “Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide” section of the Owner’s Manual. (Some computers may take a while to display the window.). NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 4 If a message allowing Windows to search 5 online for driver software appears, click “Don’t search online.” If a message prompting you to insert the disk that came with your device appears, click [Next]. The system starts the installation. NOTE • If the “Windows Security” window appears, confirm this software is authored by Yamaha Corporation then click [Install]. 6 (Some computers may take a while to display the window.) The USB-MIDI driver installation is complete. ■Installing the Musicsoft Downloader and Digital Music Notebook Applications ● ● ● IMPORTANT • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Musicsoft Downloader on a computer running Windows 2000, XP or Vista. • You will need to log on with administrator (root) privileges in order to install Digital Music Notebook on a computer running Windows, XP or Vista. IMPORTANT • When installing the Digital Music Notebook, make sure that Internet Explorer 6.0 (with SP1) or higher is installed to your computer. IMPORTANT • Credit card settlement is required to purchase Digital Music Notebook content. Credit card processing may not be possible for some areas, so please check with your local authorities to make sure that your credit card can be used. NOTE • Use of the DMN (Digital Music Notebook) is governed by the SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT, which the purchaser fully agrees to when using the application. Please read carefully the AGREEMENT at the end of this manual before using the application. 1 Insert the Accessory CD-ROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive. The start window will appear automatically showing software applications. NOTE • If the start window does not appear automatically, double click your “My Computer” folder to open it. Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. Double click “Start.exe” and proceed to step 2, below. 2 Click [Musicsoft Downloader] or [Digital Music Notebook]. 3 Click the [install] button and follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. For Digital Music Notebook operating instructions see the help menu: launch the Digital Music Notebook application and click “Help”. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help”. * You can obtain the latest version of the Musicsoft Downloader at the following Internet URL. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ When the installation is complete, the system displays the message “The software for this device has been successfully installed.” Click [Close]. IMPORTANT • Only Musicsoft Downloader can be used to transfer files between this instrument and a computer. No other file transfer application can be used. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 111 Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide ■Troubleshooting The driver cannot be installed. • Is the USB cable connected correctly? Check the USB cable connection. Disconnect the USB cable, then connect it again. • Is the USB function enabled on your computer? When you connect the instrument to the computer for the first time, if the “Add New Hardware Wizard” does not appear, the USB function on the computer may be disabled. Perform the following steps. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP, or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista). * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Make sure that no “!” or “x” marks appear at “Universal serial bus controller” or “USB Root Hub”. If you see an “!” or “x” mark, the USB controller is disabled. • Is any unknown device registered? If driver installation fails, the instrument will be marked as an “Unknown device”, and you will not be able to install the driver. Delete the “Unknown device” by following the steps below. 1 Select [Control Panel]* ➔ [System] ➔ [Hardware] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows 2000/XP, or select [Control Panel] ➔ [Device Manager] (for Windows Vista.) * Classic View only in Windows XP. 2 Look for “Other devices” in the menu “View devices by type”. 3 If you find “Other devices”, double-click it to extend the tree to look for “Unknown device”. If one appears, select it and click the [Remove] button. • Are the volume settings of the instrument, playback device, and application program set to the appropriate levels? • Have you selected an appropriate port in the sequence software? • Are you using the latest USB-MIDI driver? The latest driver can be downloaded from the following web site. http://music.yamaha.com/download/ Playback response is delayed. • Does your computer satisfy the system requirements? • Is any other application or device driver running? Cannot suspend or resume the computer correctly. • Do not suspend the computer while the MIDI application is running. You may not be able to suspend/resume normally, depending on the particular environment (USB Host Controller, etc.). Even so, simply disconnecting and connecting the USB cable will allow you to use the instrument functions again. How can I remove the driver? [Windows 2000/XP/Vista] 1 Start the computer and use the “Administrator” account to log on Windows. Close all applications and windows that are open. 2 Insert the included CD-ROM into the CDROM drive. 4 Remove the USB cable from the instrument, and make the connection again. 3 Select “My Computer” from the Start menu. 5 Install the driver again. • Windows 2000 users..... see page 110 • Windows XP users........ see page 110 • Windows Vista users .... see page 111 4 Right-click the CD-ROM icon and select “Open” from the pop-up menu. 5 Select “USBdrvVista_” or “USBdrv2k_” folder ➔ “uninstall” folder ➔ “uninstall.exe” file and launch “uninstall.exe.” file. When controlling the instrument from your computer via USB, the instrument does not operate correctly or no sound is heard. • Did you install the driver? (page 109) • Is the USB cable connected correctly? 112 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the driver. Accessory CD-ROM Installation Guide NOTE • When using a 64-bit OS, click “uninstall_x64.exe.” from “USBdrvVista_” folder. NOTE • If the “User Account Control” window appears, click [Continue]. 6 A message asking you to restart your computer in order to complete the uninstall procedure will appear. Driver removal will be complete when you have restarted your computer. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 113 Appendix Troubleshooting ■ For the Instrument Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check the Local Control on/off. (See page 102.) Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard, etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 84), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The style or song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 102. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 90) is set to an appropriate level. The style does not sound properly. Is the split point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the split point at an appropriate key (page 79). Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 131 or a style between 143 and 160 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 131 and style numbers 143– 160 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if style playback is turned on. Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes. If the Dual voice or Split voice is being used and a style or song is playing back at the same time, some notes/sounds may be omitted (or “stolen”) from the accompaniment or song. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The Demo display is shown in Japanese, and/or there are Japanese characters in the display messages. Make sure the Language setting in the FUNCTION display is set to English. (See page 16) 114 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution The appropriate display does not appear when the [SONG], [EASY SONG ARRANGER], [STYLE], or [VOICE] button is pressed. Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons. The wrong notes sound when the keyboard is played. Perhaps the performance assistant technology is turned on. Press the [PERFORMANCE ASSISTANT] button to turn it off. The ACMP indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Is the [STYLE] button lit? Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any style-related function. There is no harmony sound. The harmony effects (01–26) behave differently according to their type. Types 01–05 function when style playback is on, chords are played in the accompaniment range of the keyboard, and a melody is played in the right-hand range. Types 06–26 will function whether style playback is on or off. For types 06–12 you need to play two notes at the same time. The “OverCurrent” message is shown in the upper area of the MAIN display and the USB device does not respond. Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 115 Messages LCD Message Comment Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash memory. All Memory Clearing... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during data transmission. Are you sure? Confirms whether Song Clear or Track Clear is executed or not. Backup Clearing... Displayed while clearing the back-up data in the flash memory. Cancel Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send is cancelled. Clearing... Displayed while executing Song Clear or Track Clear of the user songs. Com Mode Displayed when the Musicsoft Downloader is started on the PC connected to the keyboard. This will not be displayed while the instrument is played back. Completed Indicates the specified job completion such as data saving and transmission. Copy File Displayed while copying a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. Create Directory Displayed while creating a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader application. Data Error! Displayed when the user song contains illegal data. Delete File Displayed while deleting a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. Delete OK ? Confirms whether the Delete job is executed or not. Delete Directory Displayed while deleting a folder in the Musicsoft Downloader. Deleting... Displayed while the delete function is engaged. End Displayed when the transmission of Initial Send has been completed. Error! Displayed when writing has failed. “File information area is not large enough.” Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of files have become too many. File is not found. Indicates there is no file. “File too large. Loading is impossible.” Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large. Flash Clearing... Displayed while clearing the song or style data transmitted to the internal flash memory. Format OK ? [EXECUTE] Confirms whether formatting the media is executed or not. Formatting... Displayed while formatting. Load OK ? Confirms whether loading is executed or not. Loading... Displayed while loading data. Media is not inserted. Displayed when accessing the media while it is not inserted. Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory becomes full. Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during song recording. “MIDI receive buffer overflow.” Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed. Move File Displayed while moving a file in the Musicsoft Downloader. “Now Writing... (Don’t turn off the power now, otherwise the data may be damaged.)” Displayed while writing data in the memory. Never turn the power off while writing. Doing so may result in data loss. OverCurrent Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. 116 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Messages LCD Message Comment Overwrite ? Confirms whether overwriting is executed or not. Please Wait... Displayed when executing the jobs that take some time, such as displaying scores and lyrics. Rename File Displayed while rewriting the file name in the Musicsoft Downloader. Save OK ? Confirms whether saving is executed or not. Saved data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist. Saving... Displayed while saving data in the memory. Never turn the power off while saving. Doing so may result in data loss. Send OK? Confirms whether the data transmission is executed or not. Sending... Displayed while transmitting data. “Since the media is in use now, this function is not available.” Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Sure ? [YES/NO] Reconfirms whether each operation is executed or not. “The limit of the media has been reached.” Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has become too complicated. The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted. “The media is write-protected.” Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use. “The song data is too large to be converted to notation.” Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the song data is too large. There are too many files. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds the capacity. “This function is not available now.” Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing another job. [nnn] “file name” Indicates the file name of the currently transmitting. “nnn” indicates the receiving block. NOTE • Not all the messages are listed in the table: the messages necessary to be explained only. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 117 Scores This demo is an example of how the Easy Song Arranger can be used to change styles throughout a piece. Song No. 9 q =123 (Function Demo for Easy Song Arranger) Hallelujah Chorus 118 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Scores DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 119 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 10 q =61 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Ave Maria P.A.T. Type =CHORD Your Turn. Repeatedly Play the Same Key. 120 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Scores DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 121 Scores This score is provided with the intent that the pitch will be corrected by the performance assistant technology feature. If you play the “Play These Notes” part using the performance assistant technology feature, the part will be corrected and played so that it matches the backing part. Song No. 11 q =108 (Function Demo for performance assistant technology) Nocturne op.9-2 P.A.T. Type =CHORD/FREE 122 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Scores DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 123 Voice List ■ Maximum Polyphony ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program change numbers are often specified as numbers “0–127.” Since this list uses a “1–128” numbering system, in such cases it is necessary to subtract 1 from the transmitted program change numbers to select the appropriate sound: e.g. to select No. 2 in the list, transmit program change number 1. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. ● Panel Voice List Voice No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 124 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 000 113 001 Live! Grand Piano 000 114 001 Live! Warm Grand Piano 000 112 001 Grand Piano 000 112 002 Bright Piano 000 112 007 Harpsichord 000 112 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 112 003 MIDI Grand Piano 000 113 003 CP 80 E.PIANO 000 114 005 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 000 118 005 Cool! Suitcase Electric Piano 000 119 005 Cool! Electric Piano 000 113 006 Hyper Tines 000 112 005 Funky Electric Piano 000 112 006 DX Modern Electric Piano 000 114 006 Venus Electric Piano 000 114 008 E.Clavichord 000 112 008 Clavi ORGAN 000 118 019 Cool! Organ 000 117 019 Cool! Rotor Organ 000 112 017 Jazz Organ 1 000 113 017 Jazz Organ 2 000 112 019 Rock Organ 000 114 019 Purple Organ 000 112 018 Click Organ 000 116 017 Bright Organ 000 127 019 Theater Organ 000 121 020 16’+2’ Organ 000 120 020 16’+4’ Organ 000 113 020 Chapel Organ 000 112 020 Church Organ 000 112 021 Reed Organ ACCORDION 000 112 022 Musette Accordion 000 113 022 Traditional Accordion 000 113 024 Bandoneon 000 113 023 Modern Harp 000 112 023 Harmonica GUITAR 000 112 025 Classical Guitar 000 112 026 Folk Guitar 000 112 027 Jazz Guitar 000 117 028 60’s Clean Guitar 000 113 026 12Strings Guitar 000 112 028 Clean Guitar 000 113 027 Octave Guitar 000 112 029 Muted Guitar 000 112 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 112 031 Distortion Guitar BASS 000 112 034 Finger Bass 000 112 033 Acoustic Bass 000 112 035 Pick Bass DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 112 036 Fretless Bass 000 112 037 Slap Bass 000 112 039 Synth Bass 000 113 039 Hi-Q Bass 000 113 040 Dance Bass STRINGS 000 116 050 Live! Orchestra 000 112 049 String Ensemble 000 112 050 Chamber Strings 000 113 050 Slow Strings 000 112 045 Tremolo Strings 000 112 051 Synth Strings 000 112 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 112 041 Violin 000 112 043 Cello 000 112 044 Contrabass 000 112 047 Harp 000 112 106 Banjo 000 112 056 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 000 112 053 Choir 000 113 053 Vocal Ensemble 000 112 055 Air Choir 000 112 054 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 000 117 067 Sweet! Tenor Sax 000 113 065 Sweet! Soprano Sax 000 114 072 Sweet! Clarinet 000 118 067 Growl Sax 000 112 067 Tenor Sax 000 112 066 Alto Sax 000 112 065 Soprano Sax 000 112 068 Baritone Sax 000 114 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 112 072 Clarinet 000 112 069 Oboe 000 112 070 English Horn 000 112 071 Bassoon TRUMPET 000 115 057 Sweet! Trumpet 000 117 058 Sweet! Trombone 000 114 060 Sweet! Muted Trumpet 000 112 057 Trumpet 000 112 058 Trombone 000 113 058 Trombone Section 000 112 060 Muted Trumpet 000 112 061 French Horn 000 112 059 Tuba BRASS 000 112 062 Brass Section 000 113 062 Big Band Brass 000 113 063 80’s Brass 000 119 062 Mellow Horns 000 114 063 Techno Brass 000 112 063 Synth Brass Voice List Voice No. 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) FLUTE 000 114 074 Sweet! Flute 000 113 076 Sweet! Pan Flute 000 112 074 Flute 000 112 073 Piccolo 000 112 076 Pan Flute 000 112 075 Recorder 000 112 080 Ocarina SYNTH LEAD 000 112 081 Square Lead 000 112 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 115 082 Analogon 000 119 082 Fargo 000 112 099 Star Dust 000 112 086 Voice Lead 000 112 101 Brightness SYNTH PAD 000 118 089 SweetHeaven 000 112 092 Xenon Pad 000 112 095 Equinox 000 112 089 Fantasia 000 113 090 Dark Moon 000 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 000 112 012 Vibraphone 000 112 013 Marimba 000 112 014 Xylophone 000 112 115 Steel Drums 000 112 009 Celesta 000 112 011 Music Box 000 112 015 Tubular Bells 000 112 048 Timpani DRUM KITS 127 000 001 Standard Kit 1 127 000 002 Standard Kit 2 127 000 009 Room Kit 127 000 017 Rock Kit 127 000 025 Electronic Kit 127 000 026 Analog Kit 127 000 113 Dance Kit 127 000 033 Jazz Kit 127 000 041 Brush Kit 127 000 049 Symphony Kit 126 000 001 SFX Kit 1 126 000 002 SFX Kit 2 ● XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Voice No. 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 *156 157 158 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 000 000 001 Grand Piano 000 001 001 Grand Piano KSP 000 040 001 Piano Strings 000 041 001 Dream 000 000 002 Bright Piano 000 001 002 Bright Piano KSP 000 000 003 Electric Grand Piano 000 001 003 Electric Grand Piano KSP 000 032 003 Detuned CP80 000 000 004 Honky-tonk Piano 000 001 004 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 000 000 005 Electric Piano 1 000 001 005 Electric Piano 1 KSP 000 032 005 Chorus Electric Piano 1 000 000 006 Electric Piano 2 000 001 006 Electric Piano 2 KSP 000 032 006 Chorus Electric Piano 2 000 041 006 DX + Analog Electric Piano 000 000 007 Harpsichord Voice No. 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 001 007 Harpsichord KSP 000 035 007 Harpsichord 2 000 000 008 Clavi 000 001 008 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 000 000 009 Celesta 000 000 010 Glockenspiel 000 000 011 Music Box 000 064 011 Orgel 000 000 012 Vibraphone 000 001 012 Vibraphone KSP 000 000 013 Marimba 000 001 013 Marimba KSP 000 064 013 Sine Marimba 000 097 013 Balimba 000 098 013 Log Drums 000 000 014 Xylophone 000 000 015 Tubular Bells 000 096 015 Church Bells 000 097 015 Carillon 000 000 016 Dulcimer 000 035 016 Dulcimer 2 000 096 016 Cimbalom 000 097 016 Santur XG ORGAN 000 000 017 Drawbar Organ 000 032 017 Detuned Drawbar Organ 000 033 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 034 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 035 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 000 037 017 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 000 040 017 16+2’2/3 000 064 017 Organ Bass 000 065 017 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 000 066 017 Cheezy Organ 000 067 017 Drawbar Organ 2 000 000 018 Percussive Organ 000 024 018 70’s Percussive Organ 000 032 018 Detuned Percussive Organ 000 033 018 Light Organ 000 037 018 Percussive Organ 2 000 000 019 Rock Organ 000 064 019 Rotary Organ 000 065 019 Slow Rotary 000 066 019 Fast Rotary 000 000 020 Church Organ 000 032 020 Church Organ 3 000 035 020 Church Organ 2 000 040 020 Notre Dame 000 064 020 Organ Flute 000 065 020 Tremolo Organ Flute 000 000 021 Reed Organ 000 040 021 Puff Organ 000 000 022 Accordion 000 000 023 Harmonica 000 032 023 Harmonica 2 000 000 024 Tango Accordion 000 064 024 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 000 000 025 Nylon Guitar 000 043 025 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 000 096 025 Ukulele 000 000 026 Steel Guitar 000 035 026 12-string Guitar 000 040 026 Nylon & Steel Guitar 000 041 026 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 000 096 026 Mandolin 000 000 027 Jazz Guitar 000 032 027 Jazz Amp 000 000 028 Clean Guitar 000 032 028 Chorus Guitar 000 000 029 Muted Guitar DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 125 Voice List Voice No. 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 *265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 126 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 040 029 Funk Guitar 000 041 029 Muted Steel Guitar 000 045 029 Jazz Man 000 000 030 Overdriven Guitar 000 043 030 Guitar Pinch 000 000 031 Distortion Guitar 000 040 031 Feedback Guitar 000 041 031 Feedback Guitar 2 000 000 032 Guitar Harmonics 000 065 032 Guitar Feedback 000 066 032 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 000 000 033 Acoustic Bass 000 040 033 Jazz Rhythm 000 045 033 Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 000 000 034 Finger Bass 000 018 034 Finger Dark 000 040 034 Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 000 043 034 Finger Slap Bass 000 045 034 Finger Bass 2 000 065 034 Modulated Bass 000 000 035 Pick Bass 000 028 035 Muted Pick Bass 000 000 036 Fretless Bass 000 032 036 Fretless Bass 2 000 033 036 Fretless Bass 3 000 034 036 Fretless Bass 4 000 000 037 Slap Bass 1 000 032 037 Punch Thumb Bass 000 000 038 Slap Bass 2 000 043 038 Velocity Switch Slap 000 000 039 Synth Bass 1 000 040 039 Techno Synth Bass 000 000 040 Synth Bass 2 000 006 040 Mellow Synth Bass 000 012 040 Sequenced Bass 000 018 040 Click Synth Bass 000 019 040 Synth Bass 2 Dark 000 040 040 Modular Synth Bass 000 041 040 DX Bass XG STRINGS 000 000 041 Violin 000 008 041 Slow Violin 000 000 042 Viola 000 000 043 Cello 000 000 044 Contrabass 000 000 045 Tremolo Strings 000 008 045 Slow Tremolo Strings 000 040 045 Suspense Strings 000 000 046 Pizzicato Strings 000 000 047 Orchestral Harp 000 040 047 Yang Chin 000 000 048 Timpani XG ENSEMBLE 000 000 049 Strings 1 000 003 049 Stereo Strings 000 008 049 Slow Strings 000 035 049 60’s Strings 000 040 049 Orchestra 000 041 049 Orchestra 2 000 042 049 Tremolo Orchestra 000 045 049 Velocity Strings 000 000 050 Strings 2 000 003 050 Stereo Slow Strings 000 008 050 Legato Strings 000 040 050 Warm Strings 000 041 050 Kingdom 000 000 051 Synth Strings 1 000 000 052 Synth Strings 2 000 000 053 Choir Aahs 000 003 053 Stereo Choir 000 032 053 Mellow Choir DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 040 053 Choir Strings 000 000 054 Voice Oohs 000 000 055 Synth Voice 000 040 055 Synth Voice 2 000 041 055 Choral 000 064 055 Analog Voice 000 000 056 Orchestra Hit 000 035 056 Orchestra Hit 2 000 064 056 Impact XG BRASS 000 000 057 Trumpet 000 032 057 Warm Trumpet 000 000 058 Trombone 000 018 058 Trombone 2 000 000 059 Tuba 000 000 060 Muted Trumpet 000 000 061 French Horn 000 006 061 French Horn Solo 000 032 061 French Horn 2 000 037 061 Horn Orchestra 000 000 062 Brass Section 000 035 062 Trumpet & Trombone Section 000 000 063 Synth Brass 1 000 020 063 Resonant Synth Brass 000 000 064 Synth Brass 2 000 018 064 Soft Brass 000 041 064 Choir Brass XG REED 000 000 065 Soprano Sax 000 000 066 Alto Sax 000 040 066 Sax Section 000 000 067 Tenor Sax 000 040 067 Breathy Tenor Sax 000 000 068 Baritone Sax 000 000 069 Oboe 000 000 070 English Horn 000 000 071 Bassoon 000 000 072 Clarinet XG PIPE 000 000 073 Piccolo 000 000 074 Flute 000 000 075 Recorder 000 000 076 Pan Flute 000 000 077 Blown Bottle 000 000 078 Shakuhachi 000 000 079 Whistle 000 000 080 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 000 000 081 Square Lead 000 006 081 Square Lead 2 000 008 081 LM Square 000 018 081 Hollow 000 019 081 Shroud 000 064 081 Mellow 000 065 081 Solo Sine 000 066 081 Sine Lead 000 000 082 Sawtooth Lead 000 006 082 Sawtooth Lead 2 000 008 082 Thick Sawtooth 000 018 082 Dynamic Sawtooth 000 019 082 Digital Sawtooth 000 020 082 Big Lead 000 096 082 Sequenced Analog 000 000 083 Calliope Lead 000 065 083 Pure Lead 000 000 084 Chiff Lead 000 000 085 Charang Lead 000 064 085 Distorted Lead 000 000 086 Voice Lead 000 000 087 Fifths Lead 000 035 087 Big Five 000 000 088 Bass & Lead Voice List Voice No. 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 016 088 Big & Low 000 064 088 Fat & Perky 000 065 088 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 000 000 089 New Age Pad 000 064 089 Fantasy 000 000 090 Warm Pad 000 000 091 Poly Synth Pad 000 000 092 Choir Pad 000 066 092 Itopia 000 000 093 Bowed Pad 000 000 094 Metallic Pad 000 000 095 Halo Pad 000 000 096 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 000 000 097 Rain 000 065 097 African Wind 000 066 097 Carib 000 000 098 Sound Track 000 027 098 Prologue 000 000 099 Crystal 000 012 099 Synth Drum Comp 000 014 099 Popcorn 000 018 099 Tiny Bells 000 035 099 Round Glockenspiel 000 040 099 Glockenspiel Chimes 000 041 099 Clear Bells 000 042 099 Chorus Bells 000 065 099 Soft Crystal 000 070 099 Air Bells 000 071 099 Bell Harp 000 072 099 Gamelimba 000 000 100 Atmosphere 000 018 100 Warm Atmosphere 000 019 100 Hollow Release 000 040 100 Nylon Electric Piano 000 064 100 Nylon Harp 000 065 100 Harp Vox 000 066 100 Atmosphere Pad 000 000 101 Brightness 000 000 102 Goblins 000 064 102 Goblins Synth 000 065 102 Creeper 000 067 102 Ritual 000 068 102 To Heaven 000 070 102 Night 000 071 102 Glisten 000 096 102 Bell Choir 000 000 103 Echoes 000 000 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 000 000 105 Sitar 000 032 105 Detuned Sitar 000 035 105 Sitar 2 000 097 105 Tamboura 000 000 106 Banjo 000 028 106 Muted Banjo 000 096 106 Rabab 000 097 106 Gopichant 000 098 106 Oud 000 000 107 Shamisen 000 000 108 Koto 000 096 108 Taisho-kin 000 097 108 Kanoon 000 000 109 Kalimba 000 000 110 Bagpipe 000 000 111 Fiddle 000 000 112 Shanai XG PERCUSSIVE 000 000 113 Tinkle Bell 000 096 113 Bonang 000 097 113 Altair Voice No. 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 Bank Select MIDI Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 000 098 113 Gamelan Gongs 000 099 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 000 100 113 Rama Cymbal 000 000 114 Agogo 000 000 115 Steel Drums 000 097 115 Glass Percussion 000 098 115 Thai Bells 000 000 116 Woodblock 000 096 116 Castanets 000 000 117 Taiko Drum 000 096 117 Gran Cassa 000 000 118 Melodic Tom 000 064 118 Melodic Tom 2 000 065 118 Real Tom 000 066 118 Rock Tom 000 000 119 Synth Drum 000 064 119 Analog Tom 000 065 119 Electronic Percussion 000 000 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 000 000 121 Fret Noise 000 000 122 Breath Noise 000 000 123 Seashore 000 000 124 Bird Tweet 000 000 125 Telephone Ring 000 000 126 Helicopter 000 000 127 Applause 000 000 128 Gunshot 064 000 001 Cutting Noise 064 000 002 Cutting Noise 2 064 000 004 String Slap 064 000 017 Flute Key Click 064 000 033 Shower 064 000 034 Thunder 064 000 035 Wind 064 000 036 Stream 064 000 037 Bubble 064 000 038 Feed 064 000 049 Dog 064 000 050 Horse 064 000 051 Bird Tweet 2 064 000 056 Maou 064 000 065 Phone Call 064 000 066 Door Squeak 064 000 067 Door Slam 064 000 068 Scratch Cut 064 000 069 Scratch Split 064 000 070 Wind Chime 064 000 071 Telephone Ring 2 064 000 081 Car Engine Ignition 064 000 082 Car Tires Squeal 064 000 083 Car Passing 064 000 084 Car Crash 064 000 085 Siren 064 000 086 Train 064 000 087 Jet Plane 064 000 088 Starship 064 000 089 Burst 064 000 090 Roller Coaster 064 000 091 Submarine 064 000 097 Laugh 064 000 098 Scream 064 000 099 Punch 064 000 100 Heartbeat 064 000 101 Footsteps 064 000 113 Machine Gun 064 000 114 Laser Gun 064 000 115 Explosion 064 000 116 Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 127 Drum Kit List • “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “128: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 ... 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C#0 D0 E0 F0 D#0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 B0 C1 A#0 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 C#6 D6 E6 F6 G6 D#6 F#6 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 128 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 128 127/000/001 129 127/000/002 130 127/000/009 131 127/000/017 132 127/000/025 133 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Snare Roll 2 Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy Open Rim Shot H Short Kick Tight Short Kick Short Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2 Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Short Kick Analog Side Stick Analog Snare Analog Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Tom Room 1 Snare Rock Rim Tom Rock 1 Snare Noisy 3 Tom Electro 1 Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Room 4 Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 4 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 4 Tom Electro 5 Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Snare Analog 2 Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Drum Kit List Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note# C#0 D0 E0 F0 D#0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 B0 C1 A#0 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 C#6 D6 E6 F6 G6 D#6 F#6 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note# 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Note C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B C C# D D# E F F# G -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Off assign 3 3 4 4 O O O 1 1 1 O O O 2 2 128 127/000/001 134 127/000/113 135 127/000/033 136 127/000/041 137 127/000/049 138 126/000/001 139 126/000/002 Standard Kit 1 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch H Scratch L Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare Soft Sticks Kick Soft Open Rim Shot Kick Tight Kick Side Stick Snare Hand Clap Snare Tight Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bells Bell Tree Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare Techno Kick Techno Q Rim Gate Kick Techno L Kick Techno Side Stick Analog Snare Clap Snare Dry Tom Analog 1 Hi-Hat Closed Analog3 Tom Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 4 Tom Analog 3 Hi-Hat Open Analog 2 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 5 Crash Analog Tom Analog 6 Cowbell Analog Conga Analog H Conga Analog M Conga Analog L Maracas 2 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2 Kick Soft 2 Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute Kick Jazz Kick Small Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Snare Jazz M Tom Jazz 1 Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5 Hand Cymbal Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6 Hand Cymbal Short Tom Jazz 6 Cutting Noise Phone Call Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Door Slam String Slap Scratch Cut Scratch H 3 Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Hand Cymbal 2 Train Jet Plane Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Claves 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch L 3 Maou DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 129 Style List Style No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 130 Style Name 8BEAT ChartPianoPop BritPopRock 8BeatModern Cool8Beat Classic8Beat 60’sGuitarPop 8BeatAdria 60’s8Beat BubblegumPop BritPopSwing OffBeat 60’sRock HardRock RockShuffle 8BeatRock 16BEAT 16Beat PianoPopShufle PopShuffle1 PopShuffle2 GuitarPop 16BeatUptempo KoolShuffle JazzRock HipHopLight BALLAD ChartPianoBld PopGtrBallad 80’sBallad PianoBallad LoveSong 6/8ModernEP 6/8SlowRock 6/8OrchBallad OrganBallad PopBallad 16BeatBallad1 16BeatBallad2 DANCE ClubBeat Electronica FunkyHouse MellowHipHop EuroTrance Ibiza DreamDance TechnoPolis Clubdance ClubLatin Garage UKPop HipHopGroove HipShuffle HipHopPop DISCO 70’sDisco1 70’sDisco2 LatinDisco DiscoPhilly SaturdayNight DiscoChocolate DiscoHands DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Style No. 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 Style Name SWING&JAZZ TradJazzPiano1 TradJazzPiano2 PianoBarBlues BigBandFast BigBandMedium BigBandBallad BigBandShuffle JazzClub Swing1 Swing2 OrchestraSwing Five/Four JazzBallad Dixieland Ragtime AfroCuban Charleston R&B Soul DetroitPop1 60’sRock&Roll 6/8Soul CrocoTwist Rock&Roll DetroitPop2 BoogieWoogie ComboBoogie 6/8Blues COUNTRY 70’sCountry Country8Beat CountryPop CountrySwing CountryBallad Country2/4 CowboyBoogie CountryShuffle Bluegrass LATIN BrazilianSamba BossaNova PopBossa Tijuana DiscoLatin Mambo Salsa Beguine GuitarRumba RumbaFlamenco RumbaIsland Reggae BALLROOM VienneseWaltz EnglishWaltz Slowfox Foxtrot Quickstep Tango Pasodoble Samba ChaChaCha Rumba Style No. 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Style Name Jive TRADITIONAL USMarch 6/8March GermanMarch PolkaPop OberPolka Tarantella Showtune ChristmasSwing ChristmasWaltz ScottishReel Hawaiian WALTZ ItalianWaltz MariachiWaltz GuitarSerenade SwingWaltz JazzWaltz1 JazzWaltz2 CountryWaltz OberWaltzer Musette CHILDREN Learning2/4 Learning4/4 Learning6/8 Fun 3/4 Fun 4/4 PIANIST Stride PianoBlues1 PianoBlues2 PianoRag PianoRock&Roll PianoBoogie PianoJazzWaltz PianoJazzBld Arpeggio Musical Habanera SlowRock 8BtPianoBallad PianoMarch 6/8PianoMarch PianoWaltz PianoBeguine PianoSwing Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name ALL TIME HITS 1 Jude Hey 2 New UK 3 MyLoving 4 All OK 5 Buttercp 6 JustCall 7 CheepChp 8 Daddy's 9 Dance? 10 GetBack 11 GtrWheel 12 HighTide 13 IWasBorn 14 Sailing 15 BluJeans 16 Holiday 17 Imagine 18 LoveMe 19 LetItBld 20 LdyMdona 21 YelowSub 22 Marriage 23 MovinOut 24 My Shell 25 NowNever 26 DoLoveMe 27 TcktRide 28 SeeClear 29 Masachus 30 Hard Day 31 USA Pie 32 Norway 33 YesterBd MODERN POP 34 Watches 35 SoundMPH 36 Hold Us 37 Unfound 38 NeedSome 39 PrtTmLvr 40 MoonShdw 41 NikitSng 42 Sure of 43 Off Day 44 Tell Her 45 GirlsMne 46 NeedLove POP CLASSICS 47 Standing 48 RainLaff 49 Sunshine 50 ForNamdo 51 ThankFor 52 ManPiano 53 CoinLane 54 LovesYou 55 Tmbourin 56 Alone 57 GldField 58 Raindrop 59 SultanSw 60 Life'sWk 61 TopWorld MDB No. MDB Name 62 WatchGrl POP BALLAD 63 WnderLnd 64 CanIStop 65 EvryTime 66 IvoryAnd 67 TheWorld 68 LovWoman 69 Dolannes 70 Madigan 71 Paradise 72 Whisper BALLAD 73 AllOdds 74 AtonalFl 75 Hero 76 Woman 77 RunToYou 78 LoveOfAl 79 CndleWnd 80 Cavatina 81 Cherish 82 ToLoveMe 83 YouKnow 84 Evrythng 85 EyesOfBl 86 Hello 87 BeThere 88 FlyAway 89 LoveYou 90 NeverLet 91 JustOnce 92 IfYouGo 93 SavingAl 94 InTheDrk 95 LovePwr 96 Vision 97 Beautifl 98 AllAlone 99 Opposite 100 BeHonest 101 SayYou 102 SayNthng 103 Stranger 104 OneDay 105 TheBayou 106 ThisSong 107 Distance 108 ThisWay 109 LoveGone 110 Inspirng 111 TrueColr ROCK & ROLL 112 ShakenUp 113 Beethovn 114 HurryLov 115 BeCruel 116 Jumping 117 Countdwn 118 SuePeggy 119 Champion 120 Jailhous 121 BlueShoe 122 Rockin24 MDB No. MDB Name 123 Shouting 124 Rock&Rll 125 HonkyTnk OLDIES 126 Daydream 127 Sumertme 128 Diana's 129 Uptown 130 Apache 131 IGotIt 132 Tonight 133 MyPillow 134 NoRain 135 FInalDance 136 SlpnLion 137 Ghetto 138 LipsLcky 139 PrettyWm 140 TikiGtr 141 TurnThre 142 Sherry DANCE & DISCO 143 Babylon 144 Goodbye 145 Catch22 146 DISCO 147 Survival 148 TheNavy 149 DontHide 150 Celebrat 151 LondonRU 152 10,2 Sun 153 ShakeYou 154 Believe 155 BoySumer 156 I'mSexy 157 StuffHot SWING & JAZZ 158 Patrol 159 Charles 160 GiveLove 161 Rhythm 162 LOVE 163 LeroyBad 164 Caraban 165 Misbehav 166 Safari 167 Smiling 168 SoWhatIs 169 TimeGone 170 TasteHny 171 Sandman 172 Tunisian 173 TwoFoot 174 MyBaby R&B 175 AsPlayed 176 BabyGrov 177 Highwy66 178 SweetCHI 179 JustU&Me 180 ManLoves 181 OurLove 182 Wish I MDB No. MDB Name COUNTRY 183 OnTheRd 184 Breathe 185 InMyMind 186 ContryHw 187 GreenGrs 188 EverNeed 189 Lonesone 190 Lucille 191 HomeRng 192 Tennesse LATIN 193 Bananabt 194 DanceMng 195 DntWorry 196 Jamaica 197 FleaSpa 198 I'mPola 199 MamboJm 200 OneNote 201 PasoCani 202 SayNoMor 203 Beguine 204 Tijuana 205 Picture ENTERTAINMENT 206 OnTheHil 207 Barnacle 208 Califrag 209 DadClock 210 DanceLd 211 DnceFire 212 BigCntry 213 Cabaret 214 OdeToJoy 215 Mi-Re-Do 216 MyPrince 217 Necesary 218 NoBuiz 219 NoisyOld 220 Sleigh 221 RockBasy 222 Magnifiq 223 Magnfcnt 224 SilentNt 225 Nabucco 226 Standing 227 SummerPl 228 Christms 229 Favorite 230 Tubbie 231 Turkish 232 12OClock WALTZ & TRADITIONAL 233 Blk&Whte 234 CanCan 235 Charmain 236 Musicbox 237 Clementn 238 Doodah! 239 Dreamer 240 EnterRag 241 Birthday 242 MaryLamb MDB No. MDB Name 243 Donald's 244 MoonWlz 245 MoulinHt 246 Sunshine 247 PieceOf 248 GreenSlv 249 TakeFour 250 TexRose 251 ThePolka 252 Scarboro 253 Edelweis 254 AroundWd 255 Whatever 256 Yankee's WORLD 257 Hawaii 258 D'amor 259 ElCondor 260 GoodbyRm 261 ILandOn 262 ItalyBel 263 Cucarumb 264 Puntuali 265 Cielito 266 ItalySun 267 SantaLuc 268 Trumpetr 269 VanMass PIANIST 270 ItalySun 271 BeGood 272 Chaie's 273 Flower 274 Frenetic 275 Highwy66 276 Leaves 277 Miload 278 Cabaret 279 Wonderfl 280 Submarin 281 Mi-Re-Do 282 MoreRhum 283 NoBuiz 284 BeatifulSn 285 OhBlah 286 Charades 287 Sally's 288 Nabucco 289 Spanish 290 SunnyStr 291 MistyFln 292 LdnBridg 293 GrndClck 294 Importnc 295 Snowman 296 Favorite 297 SugerSpn 298 Washngtn 299 ThisWay 300 ZipperD DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 131 Songs Provided On the Supplied CD-ROM File Name 001Nutcr.mid 002Orphe.mid 003Slavo.mid 004Prima.mid 005Medit.mid 006Guill.mid 007Fruhl.mid 008Ungar.mid 009Fruhl.mid 010Dolly.mid 011Cande.mid 012Arabe.mid 013Pasto.mid 014Petit.mid 015Innoc.mid 016Progr.mid 017Taren.mid 018Cheva.mid 019Etude.mid 020Marci.mid 021Turki.mid 022Valse.mid 023Menue.mid 024Momen.mid 025Enter.mid 026Prelu.mid 027Violl.mid 028Angel.mid 029Saraf.mid 030Ameri.mid 031Brown.mid 032Lomon.mid 033Bonni.mid 034Londo.mid 035Banjo.mid 036Vogle.mid 037Lorel.mid 038Funic.mid 039Turke.mid 040Campt.mid 041Jingl.mid 042Muss.mid 043Liebe.mid 044Jesu.mid 045Joy.mid 046Pearl.mid 047Gavot.mid 048Seren.mid 049Menue.mid 050Canon.mid 051Vogel.mid 052Piano.mid 053Surpr.mid 054WildR.mid 055Chans.mid 056Babbi.mid 057RowRo.mid 058Smoky.mid 059WeWis.mid 060ImMai.mid 061Chris.mid 062MaryH.mid 063TenLi.mid 064PopGo.mid 065Twink.mid 066Close.mid 067Cucko.mid 068Augus.mid 069Londo.mid 070Three.mid Song Name Danse des Mirlitons from “The Nutcracker” “Orphée aux Enfers” Ouverture Slavonic Dances op.72-2 La Primavera (from Le Quattro Stagioni) Méditation (Thaïs) Guillaume Tell Frühlingslied Ungarische Tänze Nr.5 Frühlingsstimmen Dolly’s Dreaming and Awakening La Candeur Arabesque Pastorale Petite Réunion Innocence Progrès Tarentelle La Chevaleresque Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de l’adieu” Marcia alla Turca Turkish March Valse op.64-1 “Petit Chien” Menuett Moments Musicaux op.94-3 The Entertainer Prelude (Wohltemperierte Klavier 1-1) La Viollette Angels Serenade Krasnyj Sarafan America the Beautiful Little Brown Jug Loch Lomond My Bonnie Londonderry Air Ring de Banjo Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär ? Die Lorelei Funiculi Funicula Turkey in the Straw Camptown Races Jingle Bells Muss i denn Liebesträume Nr.3 Jesu, Joy Of Man’s Desiring Ode to Joy Pearl Fisher Gavotte Serenade/Haydn Menuett BWV. Anh.114 Canon in D Der Vogelfänger Bin Ich Ja “Die Zauberflöte” Piano Sonate No.14 op.27-2 “Mondschein” The “Surprise” Symphony No.94 To a Wild Rose Chanson du Toreador O Mio Babbino Caro Row Row Row Your Boat (DUET) On Top of Old Smoky (DUET) We Wish You A Merry Christmas (DUET) Im Mai (DUET) O Christmas Tree (DUET) Mary Had a Little Lamb (DUET) Ten Little Indians (DUET) Pop Goes The Weasel (DUET) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (DUET) Close Your Hands, Open Your Hands (DUET) The Cuckoo (DUET) O du lieber Augustin (DUET) London Bridge (DUET) Three Blind Mice (DUET) The easy song arranger can only be used with songs that include chord data. 132 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Composer P.I. Tchaikovsky J. Offenbach ˇ A. Dvorák A. Vivaldi J. Massenet G. Rossini F. Mendelssohn J. Brahms J. Strauss II T.Oesten J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller J.F.Burgmüller F.Chopin L.v. Beethoven W.A. Mozart F.Chopin L. Boccherini F. Schubert S. Joplin J.S. Bach L.Streabbog Traditional Traditional S.A. Ward Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S.C. Foster Traditional F. Silcher L. Denza Traditional S.C. Foster J.S. Pierpont F. Silcher F. Liszt J.S. Bach L.v. Beethoven G. Bizet F.J. Gossec F.J. Haydn J.S. Bach J. Pachelbel W.A. Mozart L.v. Beethoven F.J. Haydn E.A. MacDowell G. Bizet G. Puccini Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional S. Winner Traditional Traditional J.J. Rousseau Traditional Traditional Traditional Traditional Effect Type List ● Harmony Types No. Harmony Type 01 Duet 02 Trio 03 Block 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note Description Harmony types 01–05 are pitch-based and add one-, two- or three-note harmonies to the single-note melody played in the right hand. These types sound when chords are played in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard. These Harmony types will also work when playing songs that contain chord data. 3 3 Types 6–26 are rhythm-based effects and add embellishments or delayed repeats in time with the auto accompaniment. These types sound whether the auto accompaniment is on or not; however, the actual speed of the effect depends on the Tempo setting (page 32). The individual note values in each type let you synchronize the effect precisely to the rhythm. Triplet settings are also available: 1/6 = quarter-note triplets, 1/12 = eighth-note triplets, 1/24 = sixteenth-note triplets. • The Trill effect Types (06–12) create two-note trills (alternating notes) when two notes are held. • The Tremolo effect Types (13–19) repeat all held notes (up to four). • The Echo effect Types (20–26) create delayed repeats of each note played. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● Reverb Types No. Reverb Type Description 01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 ● Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. 03–04 Flanger 1–2 Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound. Off No effect. 05 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 133 134 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Change Control 0,32 1,11,84 6,38 7,10 64 71 72 73 74 91,93 96-97 100-101 Key’s Ch’s After Touch Pitch Bend Note ON Note OFF Velocity o x o o o x o x x o x o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 9nH,v=0 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 0 - 127 : True voice ************** 3 x ************** Default Messages Altered Mode Note Number 1 - 16 x Default Changed Basic Channel Function... Transmitted o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0-24 semi x x o 9nH,v=1-127 x 0 - 127 0 - 127 3 x x 1 - 16 x Recognized YAMAHA [ Portable Grand ] Model DGX-530/YPG-535 MIDI Implementation Chart Sustain Harmonic Content Release Time Attack Time Brightness Effect Depth RPN Inc,Dec RPN LSB,MSB Data Entry Bank Select Remarks Date:10-OCT-2007 Version:1.0 MIDI Implementation Chart : True # x x x x o x Aux o(120,126,127) o(121) o(122) o(123-125) o x o o x x x o o 0 - 127 *1 Refer to #2 on page 136. Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO :All Sound OFF :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF Mes- :Active Sense sages:Reset o o x x x o o 0 - 127 ************** System : Clock Real Time: Commands Common : Song Pos. : Song Sel. : Tune System Exclusive Prog Change o : Yes x : No MIDI Implementation Chart DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 135 MIDI Data Format NOTE: 1 By default (factory settings) the instrument ordinarily functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator, and incoming data does not affect the panel voices or panel settings. However, the MIDI messages listed below do affect the panel voices, auto accompaniment, and songs. • MIDI Master Tuning • System exclusive messages for changing the Reverb Type and Chorus Type. 2 Messages for these control change numbers cannot be transmitted from the instrument itself. However, they may be transmitted when playing the accompaniment, song or using the Harmony effect. 3 Exclusive <GM System ON> F0H, 7EH, 7FH, 09H, 01H, F7H • This message automatically restores all default settings for the instrument, with the exception of MIDI Master Tuning. <MIDI Master Volume> F0H, 7FH, 7FH, 04H, 01H, ll, mm, F7H • This message allows the volume of all channels to be changed simultaneously (Universal System Exclusive). • The values of “mm” is used for MIDI Master Volume. (Values for “ll” are ignored.) <MIDI Master Tuning> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 27H, 30H, 00H, 00H, mm, ll, cc, F7H • This message simultaneously changes the tuning value of all channels. • The values of “mm” and “ll” are used for MIDI Master Tuning. • The default value of “mm” and “ll” are 08H and 00H, respectively. Any values can be used for “n” and “cc”. <Reverb Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 00H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Reverb Type MSB • ll : Reverb Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 136) for details. <Chorus Type> F0H, 43H, 1nH, 4CH, 02H, 01H, 20H, mmH, llH, F7H • mm : Chorus Type MSB • ll : Chorus Type LSB Refer to the Effect Map (page 136) for details. 4 When the accompaniment is started, an FAH message is transmitted. When accompaniment is stopped, an FCH message is transmitted. When the clock is set to External, both FAH (accompaniment start) and FCH (accompaniment stop) are recognized. 5 Local ON/OFF <Local ON> Bn, 7A, 7F <Local OFF> Bn, 7A, 00 Value for “n” is ignored. ■ Effect map * When a Type LSB value is received that corresponds to no effect type, a value corresponding to the effect type (coming the closest to the specified value) is automatically set. * The numbers in parentheses in front of the Effect Type names correspond to the number indicated in the display. ● REVERB TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 00 000 No Effect 001 (01)Hall1 002 Room 003 004 005...127 01 02 08 16 17 (02)Hall2 (03)Hall3 Stage (06)Stage1 (07)Stage2 Plate (08)Plate1 (09)Plate2 18 (04)Room1 19 20 (05)Room2 No Effect ● CHORUS TYPE LSB TYPE MSB 000...063 00 064 Thru 065 Chorus 066 Celeste 067 Flanger 068...127 136 01 02 08 16 17 No Effect No Effect DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual (02)Chorus2 (01)Chorus1 (03)Flanger1 (04)Flanger2 18 19 20 ATTENTION SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“AGREEMENT”) CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE. YOU ARE ONLY PERMITTED TO USE THIS SOFTWARE PURSUANT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS AGREEMENT IS BETWEEN YOU (AS AN INDIVIDUAL OR LEGAL ENTITY) AND YAMAHA CORPORATION (“YAMAHA”). BY BREAKING THE SEAL OF THIS PACKAGE YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY, OR OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE. 1. GRANT OF LICENSE AND COPYRIGHT Yamaha hereby grants you the right to use one copy of the software program(s) and data (“SOFTWARE”) accompanying this Agreement. The term SOFTWARE shall encompass any updates to the accompanying software and data. The SOFTWARE is owned by Yamaha and/or Yamaha’s licensor(s), and is protected by relevant copyright laws and all applicable treaty provisions. While you are entitled to claim ownership of the data created with the use of SOFTWARE, the SOFTWARE will continue to be protected under relevant copyrights. • You may use the SOFTWARE on a single computer. • You may make one copy of the SOFTWARE in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, if the SOFTWARE is on media where such backup copy is permitted. On the backup copy, you must reproduce Yamaha’s copyright notice and any other proprietary legends that were on the original copy of the SOFTWARE. • You may permanently transfer to a third party all your rights in the SOFTWARE, provided that you do not retain any copies and the recipient reads and agrees to the terms of this Agreement. 2. RESTRICTIONS • You may not engage in reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation or otherwise deriving a source code form of the SOFTWARE by any method whatsoever. • You may not reproduce, modify, change, rent, lease, or distribute the SOFTWARE in whole or in part, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE. • You may not electronically transmit the SOFTWARE from one computer to another or share the SOFTWARE in a network with other computers. • You may not use the SOFTWARE to distribute illegal data or data that violates public policy. • You may not initiate services based on the use of the SOFTWARE without permission by Yamaha Corporation. Copyrighted data, including but not limited to MIDI data for songs, obtained by means of the SOFTWARE, are subject to the following restrictions which you must observe. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be used for any commercial purposes without permission of the copyright owner. • Data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be duplicated, transferred, or distributed, or played back or performed for listeners in public without permission of the copyright owner. • The encryption of data received by means of the SOFTWARE may not be removed nor may the electronic watermark be modified without permission of the copyright owner. 3. TERMINATION This Agreement becomes effective on the day that you receive the SOFTWARE and remains effective until terminated. If any copyright law or provisions of this Agreement is violated, the Agreement shall terminate automatically and immediately without notice from Yamaha. Upon such termination, you must immediately destroy the licensed SOFTWARE, any accompanying written documents and all copies thereof. 4. LIMITED WARRANTY ON MEDIA 5. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE You expressly acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk. The SOFTWARE and related documentation are provided “AS IS” and without warranty of any kind. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AS TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS, AND IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SPECIFICALLY, BUT WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YAMAHA DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. 6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY YAMAHA’S ENTIRE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE TO PERMIT USE OF THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE TERMS HEREOF. IN NO EVENT SHALL YAMAHA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EXPENSES, LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA OR OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF YAMAHA OR AN AUTHORIZED DEALER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. In no event shall Yamaha’s total liability to you for all damages, losses and causes of action (whether in contract, tort or otherwise) exceed the amount paid for the SOFTWARE. 7. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Third party software and data (“THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE”) may be attached to the SOFTWARE. If, in the written materials or the electronic data accompanying the Software, Yamaha identifies any software and data as THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, you acknowledge and agree that you must abide by the provisions of any Agreement provided with the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE and that the party providing the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is responsible for any warranty or liability related to or arising from the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. Yamaha is not responsible in any way for the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE or your use thereof. • Yamaha provides no express warranties as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. IN ADDITION, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha shall not provide you with any service or maintenance as to the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. • Yamaha is not liable to you or any other person for any damages, including, without limitation, any direct, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, expenses, lost profits, lost data or other damages arising out of the use, misuse or inability to use the THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. 8. GENERAL This Agreement shall be interpreted according to and governed by Japanese law without reference to principles of conflict of laws. Any dispute or procedure shall be heard before the Tokyo District Court in Japan. If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any portion of this Agreement to be unenforceable, the remainder of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect. 9. COMPLETE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to use of the SOFTWARE and any accompanying written materials and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written or oral, regarding the subject matter of this Agreement. No amendment or revision of this Agreement will be binding unless in writing and signed by a fully authorized representative of Yamaha. As to SOFTWARE sold on tangible media, Yamaha warrants that the tangible media on which the SOFTWARE is recorded will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of fourteen (14) days from the date of receipt, as evidenced by a copy of the receipt. Yamaha’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy will be replacement of the defective media if it is returned to Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha dealer within fourteen days with a copy of the receipt. Yamaha is not responsible for replacing media damaged by accident, abuse or misapplication. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, YAMAHA EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES ON THE TANGIBLE MEDIA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 137 SIBELIUS SCORCH LICENSE AGREEMENT By installing and/or using this Product you (an individual or legal entity) agree with the Licensor to be bound by the terms of this License which will govern your use of the Product. If you do not accept these terms, do not install or use this Product. The Product is copyright © 1987-2007 Sibelius Software, a division of Avid Technology, Inc, and its licensors. 1. Definitions In this License the following words and expressions have the following meanings: “License”: this agreement between you and the Licensor and, if permitted by the context, the conditional license granted to you in this agreement. “Licensor”: Avid Technology, Inc., of Avid Technology Park, One Park West, Tewksbury, MA 01876 USA, through its division Sibelius Software, of 20-23 City North, Fonthill Road, London N4 3HF, UK “Product”: the Software and the Documentation. “Software”: the Sibelius Scorch web browser plug-in, Opus, Helsinki, Inkpen2 and Reprise font families, any other programs or files supplied by the Licensor which are included in or with the Sibelius Scorch installer, and the Sibelius Scorch installer. “Documentation”: any documentation in any form relating to the Software supplied to you with the Software or by the Licensor. 2. License 2.1 The Licensor grants to you a non-exclusive non-transferable license to use this Software in accordance with the Documentation on any number of computers. Title to the Product is not transferred to you. Ownership of the Product remains vested in the Licensor and its licensors, subject to the rights granted to you under this License. All other rights are reserved. You may make one printout for your own use of any part of the Documentation provided in electronic form. You shall not make or permit any third party to make any further copies of any part of the Product whether in eye or machine-readable form. You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, (1) translate, enhance, modify, alter or adapt the Product or any part of it for any purpose (including without limitation for the purpose of error correction); (2) create derivative works based on the Product, or cause the whole or any part of the Product to be combined with or incorporated into any other program, file or product, for any purpose; or (3) use the Software to create files in any format (other than temporary files created and required by your computer’s operating system or web browser), including without limitation screen capture files, files generated from the Software’s playback, graphics files and print files, for any purpose, except for creating MIDI files (if permitted by the Software) for private non-commercial use. You shall not, and shall not cause or permit any third party to, decompile, decode, disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part for any purpose. You shall not, and shall not cause any third party to, translate, convert, decode or reverse engineer any file capable of being read by any copy or version of the Software or any data transmitted to or from any copy or version of the Software, in whole or in part for any purpose. The Product or any part of it must not be used to infringe any right of copyright or right of privacy, publicity or personality or any other right whatsoever of any other person or entity. 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 3. Copyright 3.1 You acknowledge that copyright in the Product as a whole and in the components of the Product as between you and the Licensor belongs to the Licensor or its licensors and is protected by copyright laws, national and international, and all other applicable laws. 4. Disclaimer of Liability 4.1 In consideration of the fact that the Product is licensed hereunder free of charge, (a) the Licensor disclaims any and all warranties with respect to the Product, whether expressed or implied, including without limitation any warranties that the Product is free from defects, will perform in accordance with the Documentation, is merchantable, or is fit for any particular purpose, and (b) the Licensor shall not have or incur any liability to you for any loss, cost, expense or claim (including without limitation any liability for loss or corruption of data and loss of profits, revenue or goodwill and any type of special, indirect or consequential loss) that may arise out of or in connection with your installation and use of the Product. 5. Termination 5.1 This License shall terminate automatically upon your destruction of the Product. In addition, the Licensor may elect to terminate this License in the event of a material breach by you of any condition of this License or of any of your representations, warranties, covenants or obligations hereunder. Upon notification of such termination by the Licensor, you will immediately delete the Software from your computer and destroy the Documentation. 6. Miscellaneous 6.1 No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising on the part of the Licensor of any right, power or privilege arising hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege. The rights and remedies of the Licensor in connection herewith are not exclusive of any rights or remedies provided by law. You may not distribute, loan, lease, sub-license, rent or otherwise transfer the Product to any third party. You agree to the use of your personal data in accordance with the Licensor’s privacy policy (available from the Licensor or on www.sibelius.com), which may change from time to time. This License is intended by the parties hereto to be a final expression of their agreement with respect to the subject matter hereof and a complete and exclusive statement of the terms of such agreement. This License supercedes any and all prior understandings, whether written or oral, between you and the Licensor relating to the subject matter hereof. (This section only applies if you are resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and governed by the laws of England, and both parties agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts. (This section only applies if you are not resident in the European Union:) This License shall be construed and enforced in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of California. Any suit, action or proceeding arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License shall be brought and maintained only in the United States District Court for the Northern District of California, sitting in the City of San Francisco. Each party irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of such federal court over any such suit, action or proceeding. Each party knowingly, voluntarily and irrevocably waives trial by jury in any suit, action or proceeding (including any counterclaim), whether at law or in equity, arising out of or in any way related or connected to this License or the subject matter hereof. 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 (License v5.0 (DMN), 30 July 2007) 138 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Specifications Keyboards • 88-key box type (A-1–C7), with Touch Response. Display • 320 x 240 dots LCD display (backlit) Setup • STANDBY/ON • MASTER VOLUME: MIN–MAX • LCD CONTRAST Panel Controls • SONG, VOICE, STYLE, EASY SONG ARRANGER, P.A.T. ON/OFF, LESSON L, LESSON R, LESSON START, METRONOME ON/OFF, PORTABLE GRAND, DEMO, FUNCTION, MUSIC DATABASE, HARMONY ON/OFF, DUAL ON/OFF, SPLIT ON/OFF, TEMPO/TAP, [0]–[9], [+], [-], CATEGORY, Dial, REPEAT & LEARN (ACMP ON/OFF), A-B REPEAT (INTRO/ENDING/rit.), PAUSE (SYNC START), START/STOP, REW (MAIN/AUTO FILL), FF (SYNC STOP), REGIST MEMORY ([MEMORY/BANK], [1], [2]), SONG MEMORY (REC, [1]–[5], [A]), File Control [MENU], File Control [EXECUTE], [EXIT], [LYRICS], [SCORE], [CHORD FINGERING] Realtime Control • Pitch Bend Wheel Voice • • • • 127 panel voices + 12 drum/SFX kits + 361 XGlite voices Polyphony: 32 DUAL SPLIT Style • 160 Preset Styles + External files • Style Control: ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC STOP, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL • Fingering: Multi Finger, Full Keyboard • Style Volume Music Database • 300 + External files Education Feature • Dictionary • Lesson 1–3, Repeat & Learn Registration Memory Song • 30 Preset Songs + 5 User Songs + Accessory CD-ROM Songs (70) • Song Clear, Track Clear • Song Volume • Song Control: REPEAT & LEARN, A-B REPEAT, PAUSE, REW, FF, START/STOP Performance assistant technology • Chord, Chord/Free, Melody, Chord/Melody Recording • Song User Song: Recording Tracks: 5 Songs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, STYLE MIDI • Local On/Off • Keyboard Out • Initial Send • Style Out • External Clock • Song Out Auxiliary jacks • PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN 12V, USB TO HOST, USB TO DEVICE, SUSTAIN Amplifier • 6W + 6W Speakers • 12cm x 2 + 3cm x 2 Power Consumption • 22W Power Supply • Adaptor: PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha Dimensions (W x D x H) • 1,340 x 422 x 145 mm (52-3/4” x 16-5/8” x 5-3/4”) with keyboard stand: 1,354 x 485 x 775 mm (53-1/3” x 19-1/8” x 30-1/2”) Weight • 11.0kg (24 lbs. 4 oz.) with keyboard stand: 17.0kg (37 lbs. 8 oz.) Supplied Accessories • Music Rest • Accessory CD-ROM • Keyboard Stand • Owner’s Manual • Footswitch FC5 • AC Power adaptor (PA-5D or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) * May not be included depending on your particular area. • 8 banks x 2 types Function • VOLUME: • OVERALL: • • • • • • • • • • • • Style Volume, Song Volume Tuning, Transpose, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Pitch Bend Range, Chord Fingering MAIN VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level DUAL VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level SPLIT VOICE: Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Level, Chorus Level EFFECT: Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Master EQ Type, Sustain HARMONY: Harmony Type, Harmony Volume Performance assistant technology: Performance assistant technology Type PC: PC Mode MIDI: Local On/Off, External Clock, Initial Send, Keyboard Out, Style Out, Song Out METRONOME: Time Signature Numerator, Time Signature Denominator, Metronome Volume SCORE: Quantize LESSON: Lesson Track (R), Lesson Track (L), Grade UTILITY: Demo Cancel, Language Optional Accessories • Headphones: HPE-150 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. Effects • Reverb: 9 types • Chorus: 4 types • Harmony: 26 types DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 139 Index Panel controls and terminals 140 r f +/– .................................................. 14, 65 ........................................................ 66 0–9 .................................................. 14, 65 A-B REPEAT ................................. 14, 85 ACMP ON/OFF ............................. 14, 26 CATEGORY [ ] and [ ] ........... 14, 65 Chord Fingering ............................. 14, 83 DC IN 12V ..................................... 12, 15 DEMO ............................................ 14, 33 Dial ................................................. 14, 65 DUAL ON/OFF ............................. 14, 18 EASY SONG ARRANGER .......... 14, 56 EXECUTE ...................................... 14, 94 EXIT ............................................... 14, 66 FF ................................................... 14, 32 FILE CONTROL ........................... 14, 92 FUNCTION .................................... 14, 89 HARMONY ON/OFF .................... 14, 68 INTRO/ENDING/rit. ...................... 14, 76 LCD CONTRAST .......................... 15, 67 LESSON L, R ................................. 14, 49 LESSON START ........................... 14, 48 LYRICS .......................................... 14, 36 MAIN/AUTO FILL ........................ 14, 76 MASTER VOLUME ..................... 13–14 MEMORY/BANK, 1, 2 ................. 14, 87 MENU ............................................ 14, 92 METRONOME ON/OFF ............... 14, 22 MUSIC DATABASE ..................... 14, 55 P.A.T. ON/OFF ........................ 14, 38, 46 PAUSE ........................................... 14, 32 PC ....................................................... 103 PHONES/OUTPUT ....................... 12, 15 PITCH BEND wheel ...................... 14, 71 PORTABLE GRAND .................... 14, 20 REC, 1–5, A ................................... 14, 58 REGIST MEMORY ....................... 14, 87 REPEAT & LEARN ...................... 14, 54 REW ............................................... 14, 32 SCORE ........................................... 14, 35 SONG ............................................. 14, 31 SONG MEMORY .......................... 14, 59 SPLIT ON/OFF .............................. 14, 19 STANDBY/ON .............................. 13–14 START/STOP ................................ 14, 65 STYLE ............................... 14, 25–29, 76 SUSTAIN ....................................... 12, 15 SYNC START ......................... 14, 26, 77 SYNC STOP .................................. 14, 78 TEMPO/TAP ...................... 14, 22, 32, 72 USB TO DEVICE .................. 15, 92, 100 USB TO HOST ............................ 15, 100 VOICE ............................................ 14, 17 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual Alphabetical order A F A-B Repeat ...........................................85 Accessories .............................................7 ACMP ...................................................26 Auto Accompaniment Range ................26 Auto-Accompaniment ..............26, 28, 30 File Control .......................................... 92 File Name ............................................. 95 Flash Memory ...................................... 34 Foot Switch .......................................... 12 Format (File Control) ........................... 94 Function ................................... 66, 89–91 Function Display .................................. 66 B Backup ..........................................63, 106 G C CD-ROM ............................................107 Chord ..................................28–30, 81–82 Chord Dictionary ..................................84 Chord Fingering ..............................30, 83 Chord root .............................................84 Chord type (Chord Dictionary) .............84 Chord type (performance assistant technology) ...................37–38 Chord/Free type (performance assistant technology) ...................37, 40 Chord/Melody type (performance assistant technology) ...................37, 44 Chorus ...................................................70 Chorus Type .......................................133 Computer ............................101–102, 104 D Default Setting ......................................89 Delete (File Control) .............................98 Delete (Song Track) ..............................62 Delete (User Song) ...............................61 Demo ....................................................33 Demo Cancel ........................................91 Display ............................................66–67 Double-Staff Score ...............................35 Drum Kit ...............................................21 Drum Kit List ......................................128 Dual Chorus Level ................................90 Dual Octave ..........................................90 Dual Pan ...............................................90 Dual Reverb Level ................................90 Dual Voice ............................................18 Dual Volume .........................................90 E Easy Chords ..........................................30 Easy Song Arranger ..............................56 Effect Map ..........................................136 Effect Type List ..................................133 External Clock ..............................91, 102 External Song .......................................34 Grade .................................................... 51 H Harmony ............................................... 68 Harmony Type ................................... 133 Harmony Volume ................................. 91 Headphones .......................................... 12 I Initial Send ......................................... 104 Initialization ......................................... 63 K Keyboard Out ............................... 91, 102 Keyboard Stand Assembly ................... 10 L Language .............................................. 16 Lesson .................................................. 48 Load ..................................................... 97 Local ............................................. 91, 102 L-Part ........................................... 91, 106 Lyric ..................................................... 36 M Main Chorus Level ............................... 90 MAIN Display ...................................... 66 Main Octave ......................................... 90 Main Pan .............................................. 90 Main Reverb Level ............................... 90 Main Voice ........................................... 17 Main Volume ....................................... 90 Master EQ Type ............................. 74, 90 Measure ................................................ 67 Melody ........................................... 35, 47 Melody Score ....................................... 35 Melody type (performance assistant technology) .................. 37, 42 Melody Voice ................................. 57, 86 Messages ............................................ 116 Index Metronome ........................................... 22 MIDI ................................................... 102 MIDI Data Format .............................. 136 MIDI Implementation Chart ............... 134 Music Database .................................... 55 Music Rest ............................................ 13 Mute ..................................................... 86 N notation ................................................. 67 O One Touch Setting ................................ 73 P P.A.T. Type .................................... 37, 91 Panel Sustain .................................. 71, 90 PC Mode ............................................. 103 performance assistant technology ........ 37 Pitch Bend Range ................................. 90 Power Adaptor ..................................... 12 Preset Song ............................... 31, 33–34 Q Quantize ............................................... 91 R Recording ............................................. 58 Registration Memory ........................... 87 Remote control ................................... 103 Repeat ............................................. 54, 85 Reverb .................................................. 69 Reverb Type ....................................... 133 R-Part ........................................... 91, 106 S Save (File Control) ............................... 95 Score ....................................... 35, 47, 118 Single-Staff Score ................................ 35 SMF (Standard MIDI File) ................... 96 SMF Save ............................................. 96 Software Licensing Agreement .......... 137 Song ...................................................... 31 Song Clear ............................................ 61 Song List .............................................. 33 Song Memory ................................. 58–59 Song Out ....................................... 91, 102 Song Volume ........................................ 85 Specifications ..................................... 139 Split Chorus Level ................................ 90 Split Octave ..........................................90 Split Pan ................................................90 Split Point .......................................19, 79 Split Reverb Level ................................90 Split Voice ............................................19 Split Volume .........................................90 Standard Chords ...................................30 Style ..........................................25, 28, 76 Style File .........................................83, 97 Style List .............................................130 Style Out .......................................91, 102 Style Volume ........................................80 Sustain (Footswitch) .............................12 Sustain (Panel) ................................71, 90 Synchro Start ..................................26, 77 Synchro Stop .........................................78 T Tempo .............................................32, 72 TimeSignature (Denominator, Numerator) ...............23 Touch Response ....................................72 Touch Sensitivity ..................................72 Track .....................................................58 Track Clear ...........................................62 Transfer .......................................102, 104 Transpose ..............................................75 Troubleshooting ..........................112, 114 Tuning ...................................................75 U USB-MIDI Driver .......................110–111 User file ..........................................95, 97 User File Save .......................................95 User Song .......................................34, 58 V Voice .....................................................17 Voice List ...........................................124 X XF .....................................................6, 36 XGlite .....................................................6 DGX-530/YPG-535 Owner’s Manual 141 LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, PSREW, EZ, DGX230, DGX530, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. © 2015 Yamaha Corporation of America. For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. MALTA NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900 Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A. AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza, Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela Tel: +58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: +39-02-93577-1 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686260 Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 FINLAND Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama, P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen, Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: +359-2-978-20-25 CYPRUS Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd. Nikis Ave 2k 1086 Nicosia Tel: + 357-22-511080 Major Music Center 21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus Tel: (392) 227 9213 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 ITALY SWEDEN VENEZUELA BULGARIA Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 F-Musiikki Oy Antaksentie 4 FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland Tel: +358 (0)96185111 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 ICELAND Hljodfaerahusid Ehf. Sidumula 20 IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: +354-525-5050 CROATIA Euro Unit D.O.O. Slakovec 73 40305 Nedelisce Tel: +38540829400 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 AFRICA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist. New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, VIC 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: +64-9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com DMI15 Head Office/Manufacturer: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, 430-8650, Japan (For European Countries) Importer: Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2016 Yamaha Corporation WM36660 Published 02/2016 PO##*.*-**B0 Printed in China